Revelation 14:15 — Word Study
N1904Καὶ ἄλλος ἄγγελος ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ κράζων ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῆς νεφέλης· πέμψον τὸ δρέπανόν σου καὶ θέρισον, ὅτι ἦλθεν σοι ἡ ὥρα τοῦ θερίσαι, ὅτι ἐξηράνθη ὁ θερισμὸς τῆς γῆς.
BSAAndkai [at that moment, next] anotherallos [different, distinct] angelangelos [messenger of God] came outexerchomai▸ [emerged, went forth] ofek theho templenaos [the sacred place of worship] cryingkrazō▸ [shouting, proclaiming] inen a voicephōnē [sound, noise] loudmegas [great, intense] to the [One]ho [Him who is, the Lord] sittingkathēmai▸ [sitting, enthroned] onepi theho cloud;nephelē [the heavenly throne] do put forthpempō▸ [thrust in, send forth] theho sickledrepanon [harvesting tool] of Yousu [belonging to You, as the Messiah] andkai do reap,therizō▸ [gather, harvest] becausehoti [since, for the reason that] has comeerchomai▸ [arrived, is here] to you theho hourhōra [hour, appointed moment] of the to reap,therizō▸ [gather, reap] becausehoti [because, since] has ripenedxērainō▸ [mature, ready] theho harvesttherismos [harvest, fruit] of theho earth.gē [the world, humanity]
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| Καὶ | And | Conjunction |
| ἄλλος | another | Adjective, nominative, singular |
| ἄγγελος | angel | Noun, nominative, singular |
| ἐξῆλθεν | came out | Verb, second aorist, active |
| ἐκ | of | Preposition |
| τοῦ | the | Article, genitive, singular |
| ναοῦ | temple | Noun, genitive, singular |
| κράζων | crying | Verb, present, active |
| ἐν | in | Preposition |
| φωνῇ | a voice | Noun, dative, singular |
| μεγάλῃ | loud | Adjective, dative, singular |
| τῷ | to the [One] | Article, dative, singular |
| καθημένῳ | sitting | Verb, present, no voice stated |
| ἐπὶ | on | Preposition |
| τῆς | the | Article, genitive, singular |
| νεφέλης· | cloud; | Noun, genitive, singular |
| πέμψον | do put forth | Verb, aorist, active |
| τὸ | the | Article, accusative, singular |
| δρέπανόν | sickle | Noun, accusative, singular |
| σου | of You | Personal pronoun, second person, genitive |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| θέρισον, | do reap, | Verb, aorist, active |
| ὅτι | because | Conjunction |
| ἦλθεν | has come | Verb, second aorist, active |
| σοι | to you | |
| ἡ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| ὥρα | hour | Noun, nominative, singular |
| τοῦ | of the | |
| θερίσαι, | to reap, | Verb, aorist, active |
| ὅτι | because | Conjunction |
| ἐξηράνθη | has ripened | Verb, aorist, passive |
| ὁ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| θερισμὸς | harvest | Noun, nominative, singular |
| τῆς | of the | Article, genitive, singular |
| γῆς. | earth. | Noun, genitive, singular |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | Then another angel came out of the temple, crying out in a loud voice to the One seated on the cloud, “Swing Your sickle and reap, because the time has come to harvest; for the crop of the earth is ripe.” |
| KJV | And another angel came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to him that sat on the cloud, Thrust in thy sickle, and reap: for the time is come for thee to reap; for the harvest of the earth is ripe. |
| ASV | And another angel came out from the temple, crying with a great voice to him that sat on the cloud, Send forth thy sickle, and reap: for the hour to reap is come; for the harvest of the earth is ripe. |
| YLT | and another messenger did come forth out of the sanctuary crying in a great voice to him who is sitting upon the cloud, 'Send forth thy sickle and reap, because come to thee hath the hour of reaping, because ripe hath been the harvest of the earth;' |
| WEB | Another angel came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to him who sat on the cloud, “Send your sickle and reap, for the hour to reap has come; for the harvest of the earth is ripe!” |
| BBE | And another angel came out from the house of God, crying with a loud voice to him who was seated on the cloud, Put in your blade, and let the grain be cut: because the hour for cutting it is come; for the grain of the earth is over-ready. |
Where they part company is ἄγγελος — see How Translations Differ.
The sentence is structured with a main clause followed by participial and prepositional phrases that elaborate on the action and context.
8 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them ›
clause
subjectἄλλος
verbἐξέρχομαι
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — Revelation 14:15
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — The Harvest of the Earthgenerated
Revelation 14:15 presents a scene where an angel emerges from the temple, announcing to the One seated on the cloud that the time for harvesting the earth has arrived. This moment signifies the culmination of God's plan for humanity, where the earth's crop is described as ripe, indicating readiness for divine judgment or gathering. The imagery of harvesting is prevalent in biblical texts, often symbolizing the gathering of believers or the final judgment, as seen in passages like Matthew 13:30.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Revelation 16:17 | Then the seventh angel poured out his bowl into the air, and a loud voice came from the throne in the temple, saying, “It is done!” |
| 2 | Revelation 6:10 | And they cried out in a loud voice, “How long, O Lord, holy and true, until You avenge our blood and judge those who dwell upon the earth?” |
| 3 | Isaiah 62:1–6 | For Zion’s sake I will not keep silent, and for Jerusalem’s sake I will not keep still, until her righteousness shines like a bright light, her salvation like a blazing torch. |
| 4 | Revelation 14:14 | And I looked and saw a white cloud, and seated on the cloud was One like the Son of Man, with a golden crown on His head and a sharp sickle in His hand. |
| 5 | Revelation 13:12 | And this beast exercised all the authority of the first beast and caused the earth and those who dwell in it to worship the first beast, whose mortal wound had been healed. |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 13 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — θερισμὸς, therismosgenerated
The word θερισμὸς (i.e., *therismos*) means 'harvest' and comes from the verb θερίζω (to reap). It refers to the act of gathering crops, and in a spiritual context, it symbolizes the collection of souls at the end of time.
In this verse, it indicates the point at which the time for reaping has come, emphasizing the urgency and significance of the moment. The parsing shows it as a noun in the nominative case, suggesting it is the subject of the action being described.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
The verse is presented in the Berean Standard Bible, which uses the term harvest. This is consistent across multiple translations, including the KJV and ASV, which also utilize harvest in their renderings.
However, some translations differ slightly in phrasing. For instance, the YLT uses the harvest of the earth is over-ready, while the WEB states the hour to reap has come, which emphasizes the timing of the harvest.
Sentence Structuregenerated
The finite verb governing the verse is ἐξῆλθεν, came out, which leads into a series of phrases: a participial phrase describing the action of the angel, a prepositional phrase indicating the source of the angel, and clauses that detail the command given to the One on the cloud.
The structure is complex, with multiple clauses and phrases that elaborate on the action and context, highlighting the urgency of the harvest and the divine authority of the One seated on the cloud.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
θερισμὸς is found in the Septuagint, where it translates the Hebrew term for harvest, קָצִיר (H7105). This connection emphasizes the continuity of agricultural imagery in biblical texts, linking the physical act of harvesting with spiritual themes.
The word ἄγγελος also appears in the Septuagint, translating מַלְאָךְ (H4397), reinforcing the role of angels as messengers and agents of God's will.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
Revelation 14:15 describes an angel coming from the temple and calling to the One on the cloud to reap the harvest of the earth, which is ripe. This moment signifies the readiness for divine judgment and the culmination of God's plan for humanity.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
The angel's call signifies the time of judgment and the gathering of souls, indicating that the end of the age is near.
The harvest often symbolizes the gathering of believers or the judgment of the wicked, as seen in various parables and prophetic texts.
The ripeness of the harvest indicates that the time for action has come, reflecting the urgency of God's plan and the readiness of the earth's inhabitants for judgment.
Harvesting imagery is significant as it conveys themes of completion, divine judgment, and the fulfillment of God's promises throughout Scripture.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- In what ways do I see the urgency of God's call in my life today?
- How can I be more aware of the spiritual harvest around me?
- What steps can I take to prepare for the coming of the Lord?
- How does understanding the concept of harvest affect my view of evangelism?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
The early Church Fathers provide insights into the significance of this passage, interpreting the angel's message and the imagery of the harvest as a representation of divine judgment and the end of the world.
"Thrust in thy sharp sickle, and gather in the grapes of the vine," he signifies it of the nations that should perish on the advent of the Lord.Early Church Fathers on Revelation 14 →
From the explanation of the Lord, we know that the angels will be the reapers and that the end of the world is signified by the appearance of a ripe harvest.Early Church Fathers on Revelation 14 →
The cry of the angel symbolically represents the supplications of all the heavenly powers who desire to see both the honoring of the saints and the separation of the transgression of the sinners.Early Church Fathers on Revelation 14 →
Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on Revelation 14:15 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleAnd another angel came out of the temple,.... Not the Holy Spirit, who, being God omniscient, knows the day and hour of judgment, which is a secret to men and angels, as Napier thinks; since though
Read John Gill on Revelation 14 →Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryAnd another angel came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to him that sat on the cloud, Thrust in thy sickle, and reap: for the time is come for thee to reap; for the harvest of the earth is ripe.
Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 14 →Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy BibleMost interpreters understand this of the prayers of God’ s people, from the church, soliciting the Lord Jesus Christ (say some) to gather in the Jews, or the number of his elect, the fields being now white to that harvest, , or, (as others say, with whom I rather agree), to execute vengeance on antichrist and his adherents.
Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 14 →John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments15 And another angel came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to him that sat on the cloud, Thrust in thy sickle, and reap: for the time is come for thee to reap; for the harvest of the earth is ripe. Ver. 15. Thrust in thy sickle] This is not a command, but a request of the faithful, which is soon fulfilled. It is like that of the Church, Psalms 102:3; "Arise, O Lord, and have mercy upon Zion; for the time to favour her, yea, the set time, is come."
Read John Trapp on Revelation 14 →Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers(15) And another angel . . .—Translate, And another angel came forth out of the temple, &c. It has been asked, “What harvest is this?” It is the gathering of the good seed, the full corn in the ear, into the celestial garner (Mark 4:26-29). The angel who announces that the harvest is ready comes forth from the Temple, the inner shrine, the holy place which was measured off in the sanctuary of the faithful (Revelation 11:1); whereas the angel who calls for the vintage comes forth from the altar (Revelation 14:18). The angel cries—Put forth (or, send) thy sickle and reap, because the hour is come to reap, because the harvest of the earth is ripe (or, dried); the wheat stalks are dry, and the…
Read Charles John Ellicott on Revelation 14 →AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the BibleVerse 15. Thrust in thy sickle] Execute the judgments which God has decreed. For the harvest of the earth is ripe.] The cup of the people's iniquity is full.
Read AdamClarke on Revelation 14 →CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges15. another angel] It is probably not relevant to argue that in classical Greek this would not necessarily imply that the previously named Person is an Angel, even if “another” is meant to distinguish the Angel from Him. But comparing Revelation 14:6, it appears that the angel may be called “another” simply to distinguish him from those of Rev 14:6; Revelation 14:8-9 : and then no inference whatever can be drawn as to the figure of Rev 14:14.out of the temple] See Revelation 11:19, and note on Revelation 4:6.Thrust in] Lit. send, as in St Mark 4:29, where “putteth in” should be “sendeth forth” (the Greek word is not the same as here, but there is hardly any difference in sense). It may be…
Read Cambridge on Revelation 14 →Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the BibleAnd another angel - The fourth in order, Revelation 14:6, Revelation 14:8-9. Came out of the temple - See the notes on Revelation 11:19.
Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 14 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
Then another angel came out of the temple, crying out in a loud voice to the One seated on the cloud, “Swing Your sickle and reap, because the time has come to harvest; for the crop of the earth is ripe.”
Another angel came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to him who sat on the cloud, “Send your sickle and reap, for the hour to reap has come; for the harvest of the earth is ripe!”
Then another angel came out of the temple, crying out in a loud voice to the One seated on the cloud, “Swing Your sickle and reap, because the time has come to harvest, for the crop of the earth is ripe.”
Then another angel came out of the temple, shouting in a loud voice to the one seated on the cloud, “Use your sickle and start to reap, because the time to reap has come, since the earth’s harvest is ripe!”
Tyndale line
And another angel came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to him that sat on the cloud, Thrust in thy sickle, and reap: for the time is come for thee to reap; for the harvest of the earth is ripe.
And another angel came out from the temple, crying with a great voice to him that sat on the cloud, Send forth thy sickle, and reap: for the hour to reap is come; for the harvest of the earth is ripe.
And another angel came out from the temple, crying with a great voice to him that sat on the cloud, Send forth thy sickle, and reap: for the hour to reap is come; for the harvest of the earth is over-ripe.
And another angel came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to him that sat on the cloud, Thrust in thy sickle, and reap: for the time is come for thee to reap; for the harvest of the earth is ripe.
And another Angel came out of the Temple, crying with a loude voyce to him that sate on the cloude, Thrust in thy sickle and reape: for the time is come to reape: for the haruest of the earth is ripe.
Strictly literal
And another angel came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to him that sat on the cloud, Send thy sickle and reap; for the hour of reaping is come, for the harvest of the earth is dried.
and another messenger did come forth out of the sanctuary crying in a great voice to him who is sitting upon the cloud, 'Send forth thy sickle and reap, because come to thee hath the hour of reaping, because ripe hath been the harvest of the earth;'
and another messenger came forth out of the temple crying in a great voice to Him who is sitting on the cloud, “Send forth Your sickle and reap, because the hour of reaping has come to You, because the harvest of the earth has been ripe”;
Then another angel came out of the temple and called with a loud voice to the one sitting on the cloud: “Take your sickle and start to reap. For the time to reap has come, since the harvest of the earth is ripe.”
From the Latin
And another angel came out from the temple crying with a loud voice to him that sat upon the cloud: Thrust in thy sickle, and reap, because the hour is come to reap: for the harvest of the earth is ripe.
Simplified
Another angel came out of the Temple and shouted in a loud voice to the one sitting on the cloud, “Take your sickle and start reaping, for it is harvest-time, and earth's harvest is ripe.”
And another angel came out from the house of God, crying with a loud voice to him who was seated on the cloud, Put in your blade, and let the grain be cut: because the hour for cutting it is come; for the grain of the earth is over-ready.
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
Et alius angelus exivit de templo, clamans voce magna ad sedentem super nubem : Mitte falcem tuam, et mete, quia venit hora ut metatur, quoniam aruit messis terræ.
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܘܐܚܪܢܐ ܡܠܐܟܐ ܢܦܩ ܡܢ ܗܝܟܠܐ ܘܩܥܐ ܒܩܠܐ ܪܒܐ ܠܕܝܬܒ ܥܠ ܥܢܢܐ ܫܕܪ ܡܓܠܬܟ ܘܚܨܘܕ ܡܛܠ ܕܐܬܬ ܫܥܬܐ ܠܡܚܨܕ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
Καὶ ἄλλος ἄγγελος ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ κράζων ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῆς νεφέλης· πέμψον τὸ δρέπανόν σου καὶ θέρισον, ὅτι ἦλθεν — ἡ ὥρα — θερίσαι, ὅτι ἐξηράνθη ὁ θερισμὸς τῆς γῆς.
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
Καὶ ἄλλος ἄγγελος ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ κράζων ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῆς νεφέλης· πέμψον τὸ δρέπανόν σου καὶ θέρισον, ὅτι ἦλθεν — ἡ ὥρα — θερίσαι, ὅτι ἐξηράνθη ὁ θερισμὸς τῆς γῆς.
The previous edition, still widely cited.
Καὶ ἄλλος ἄγγελος ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ κράζων ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῆς νεφέλης· πέμψον τὸ δρέπανόν σου καὶ θέρισον, ὅτι ἦλθεν — ἡ ὥρα — θερίσαι, ὅτι ἐξηράνθη ὁ θερισμὸς τῆς γῆς.
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
Καὶ ἄλλος ἄγγελος ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ κράζων ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῆς νεφέλης· πέμψον τὸ δρέπανόν σου καὶ θέρισον, ὅτι ἦλθεν — ἡ ὥρα — θερίσαι, ὅτι ἐξηράνθη ὁ θερισμὸς τῆς γῆς.
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
Καὶ ἄλλος ἄγγελος ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ κράζων ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῆς νεφέλης· πέμψον τὸ δρέπανόν σου καὶ θέρισον, ὅτι ἦλθεν — ἡ ὥρα — θερίσαι, ὅτι ἐξηράνθη ὁ θερισμὸς τῆς γῆς.
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
Καὶ ἄλλος ἄγγελος ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ κράζων ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῆς νεφέλης· πέμψον τὸ δρέπανόν σου καὶ θέρισον, ὅτι ἦλθεν — ἡ ὥρα — θερίσαι, ὅτι ἐξηράνθη ὁ θερισμὸς τῆς γῆς.
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
Καὶ ἄλλος ἄγγελος ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ κράζων ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῆς νεφέλης· πέμψον τὸ δρέπανόν σου καὶ θέρισον, ὅτι ἦλθεν — ἡ ὥρα — θερίσαι, ὅτι ἐξηράνθη ὁ θερισμὸς τῆς γῆς.
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
Καὶ ἄλλος ἄγγελος ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ κράζων ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῆς νεφέλης· πέμψον τὸ δρέπανόν σου καὶ θέρισον, ὅτι ἦλθεν σοι ἡ ὥρα τοῦ θερίσαι, ὅτι ἐξηράνθη ὁ θερισμὸς τῆς γῆς.
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
| Word | Editions carrying it | Missing from |
|---|---|---|
| σοι to you | TR | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, Byz |
| τοῦ of the | TR | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, Byz |
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in Revelation 14:15
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ἄλλος (i.e., *allos*) means 'another' or 'other.' It is used in various contexts to denote numerical distinction, as opposed to qualitative difference, which is expressed by ἕτερος (*heteros*). The New Testament uses it in passages like Matthew 20:3 and John 14:16. Lexicographers note that while ἄλλος indicates simple distinction among individuals, ἕτερος implies a difference in kind.
“AXXos, identical with the Latin ‘alius,’ is the numerically distinct ; thus Christ spoke we are told ‘ another ’ parable, and still ‘ another ,’ but each succeeding one being of the same character as those which He had spoken before (Matt. xiii. 23, 24, 31, 33), ἄλλην therefore in every case. But Zrepos, equivalent to the Latin ‘alter,’ to the German ‘ander’ (on which last word see an instructive article in Grimm’s Wéorterbuch), superadds the notion of qualitative difference. One is ‘ divers,’ the other is ‘diverse.’ There are not a few passages in the N. T. whose right interpretation, or at any rate their full understanding, will depend on an accurate seizing of the distinction between these words. Thus Christ promises to his disciples that He will send, not ἕτερον, but ἄλλον, Παράκλητον (John xiv. 16), ‘another’ Comforter therefore, similar to Himself. The dogmatic force of this…
Read the full entry →ἄλλος, -η, -ο, (cf. Lat. alius, Eng. else),
[in LXX for אַחֵר ,אֶחָד, etc.;]
other, another: absol., Mt 20:3, al.; ἄ. δέ, I Co 3:10 12:8; pl., Mk 6:15; attached to a noun, Mt 2:12 4:21, al.; c. art., ὁ ἄ., the other, Mt 5:39, Jo 19:32 (Bl., §47, 8); οἱ ἄ., the others, the rest, Jo 20:25, I Co 14:29; ἄ. πρὸς ἄλλον = πρὸς ἀλλήλους (BL, §48, 10), Ac 2:12; ἄλλ’ (i.e. ἄλλο) ἤ (Bl., §77, 13), Lk 12:51; seq. πλήν, Read the full entry →
ἄλλος, -7, -o, [cf. Lat. alius, Germ. alles, Eng. else; fr. Hom. down], another, other; a. absol.: Mt. xxvii. 42; xx. 3; Mk. vi. 15; Acts xix. 32; xxi. 34 (ἄλλοι μὲν ἄλλο), and often. b. as an adj.: Mt. ii. 12; iv. 21; Jn. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 29 (ἄλλη συνείδησις 1. 6. ἡ συν. ἄλλου τινός). ο. with the art.: ὁ ἄλλος the other (of two), Mt. v. 39; xii. 13, etc. [cf. B. 32 (28), 122 (107)]; of ἄλλοι all others, the remainder, the rest: Jn. xxi. 8; 1 Co. xiv. 29. [Syy. ἄλλος, ἕτερος: &A. as compared with ér. denotes numerical in distinction from qualitative difference; &A. adds (‘one besides’), ἕτ. distinguishes (‘one of two’); every ér. is an &A., but not every ἄλ. is a €r.; ἄλ. generally ‘ denotes simply distinction of individuals, ἕτερος involves the secondary idea of difference of kind’; e. g.2 Co. xi. 4; Gal.i. 6,7. See Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on the latter pass.; Trench § xcv.; Schmidt ch.…
Read the full entry →ἄλλος. The differentia of ἄλλος as distinguished from ἕτερος may be left to the latter article. With ἡ ἄλλη Μαρία in Mt 27% cf. P Petr III. 59 (c) (Ptol.), where a great many names appear as Θάησις ἄλλη, Κόνρηις ἄλλος, even where no duplicate appears in the document itself—its fragmentary character presumably accounts for this. (Grimm’s article on Μαρία (3) suggests the remark that the repetition of the same name within a family is paralleled in papyri: thus P Petr III. 117 (9) 4-17 £ ΓΜΠάνρης μικρὸς Τεῶτος kal Μάνρης ἀδελφὸς ὡσαύτως .---τνε quote without prejudicing the discussion as to the Maries!) The form τἄλλα with crasis is frequent: see Witkowski? (Index) p. 162 for several instances. For ἄλλος used = alter, see Proleg. p. 80 n.1, where an ex. is quoted from a Doric inscr. as early as B.C. 91. An idiomatic use of ἄλλος may be quoted from P Oxy VII. ro70% py... , ὃ μὴ εἴη, GN ἐξ…
Read the full entry →ἄλλος (allos) — another.
ἄλλος, η, ο,
[Refs 5th c.AD+] yος, cf. Latin alius):—another, i. e. one besides what has been mentioned, either adjective or pronoun: when adjective, its substantive is either in the same case, or in genitive, Ζεῦ ἄλλοι τε θεοί[Refs 8th c.BC+] —ἄ. μέν.. ἄ. δέ.. one.. another.., more rarely the one.. the other.. (of two persons, etc.), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὰ μέν.. ἄλλα δέ.. [Refs 8th c.BC+], and Attic dialect; ἕτερον μέν.. ἄλλον δέ.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄλλο μέν.. ἑτέρου δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. with τις, any other, οὐδέ τις ἄ. ἔγνω ἀλλ᾽ ἄρα Κασσάνδρη[Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδεὶς ἄ. no other, [Refs]; ἄλλα πολλά[Refs 8th c.BC+]
ἄλλος, η, ον
Adj
other, another, different
ἄλλος allos 155x
another, some other; ὁ ἄλλος, the other; οἱ ἄλλοι, the others, the rest
ἄλλος alius, another, one besides, ἄλλος μέν . , ἄλλος δέ . , one . , another . , Il.; ἄλλος τις or τὶς ἄλλος, any other, some other; οὐδεὶς ἄλλος no other; εἴ τις ἄλλος, Lat. si quis alius, any one else.
repeated, ἄλλος ἄλλο λέγει one man says one thing, one another, i. e. different men say different things; ἄλλος ἄλλῃ ἐτράπετο Xen.; λείπουσι τὸν λόφον ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν id. Xen.;—v. ἀλλαχῆ.
ἄλλος καὶ ἄλλος, one or two; ἄλλο καὶ ἄλλο one thing after another, id. Xen.
joined with the Art., ὁ ἄλλος, the other; in pl., οἱ ἄλλοι (ionic ὧλλοι), all the others, the rest; Lat. ceteri; τὰ ἄλλα, contr. τἆλλα or τἄλλα Lat. cetera, reliqua, not alia;— οὕ τε ἄλλοι καὶ . . both all the others and . . , i. e. especially .…
Adj-NSM — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
A-NSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
161 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 154 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 41 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.
ἀλλὰ ἐπιστραφέντες ἐπὶ τὰ εἴδωλα ἀπώλεσαν αὐτήν.
Φίβιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πελαίου νεωτέρου Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου Κολλούθου τοῦ Φίβιος, λιβὸς ὄρος, τὴν δʼ ἄλλην ἐπὶ Τιαβώνει· νότου γῆ Χενσθώτου τοῦ Μελιπαῖτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Παθώτου, ἀπηλιώτου γῆ Θράσωνος καὶ
κρατοῦσιν οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου τοῦ Πατοῦτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πατσεοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός,
Ἁθὺρ ε ἀπέδοτο Ἑτπεῆσις Πατῆτος τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῆι μερίδα γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου καὶ ἀπʼ ἄλλης σφραγῖδος ἐν κώμηι Τμόνοβιτ ἐν ἀρούραις η τὴν αὐτὴν μερίδα. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου χαλκοῦ
The Greek word ἄγγελος (transliterated as aggelos) means 'messenger' and is often used to refer to a divine messenger or angel. It is derived from the verb ἀγγέλλω (to announce). In the New Testament, it encompasses both heavenly beings sent by God and human messengers, with interpretations varying regarding its use in specific contexts, such as in Revelation where it may refer to church leaders or guardian angels.
ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ,
[in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ;]
a messenger, one sent: Mt 11:10, Ja 22:25.
As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Lk 1:11, or to execute them, as Mt 4:6. The ἄ. in Re 1:20 2:1, al., is variously understood as
a messenger or delegate,
a bishop or ruler,
a guardian angel,
the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, s.v.; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, s.v.)
ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, 1. a messenger, envoy, one who is sent: Mt. xi. 10; Lk. vil. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2; Jas. li. 25. [Fr. Hom. down. ] 2. In the Scriptures, both of the Old Test. and of the New, one of that host of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxviii. 2; Mk.i. 13; Lk. xvi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, ef. Heb. i. 14), now to make them known to men (LK. i. 11, 26, ii. 9 sqq.; Acts x. 3; xxvii. 23; Mt. i. 20; ii. 13; xxviii. 5; Jn. xx. 12 sq.); hence the frequent expressions ἄγγελος (angel, messenger of God, 3x90) and ἄγγελοι κυρίου or ayy. τοῦ θεοῦ. They are subject not only to God but also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22, ef. Eph. i. 21; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as…
Read the full entry →ἄγγελος. In Sy// 51271, a dialect inscr. of ii/B.c. from Calymna, ἄγγελοι are envoys whose names are given. The word is used in the sense of ‘‘intermediary” (cf. Gal 319) in Sy// 122” (iv/B.C.) ὀμόσαι δ] ἀγγέλλων. For the presumably Christian ‘‘angel” inscriptions from Thera see Deissmann LAE, Ῥ. 279 with accompanying facsimile, and the paper “It is his Angel” (J. H. M.) in 71.5 1902, p. 519 f. Add (from Cronert) 7G XII. iii. 933. In Archzv iii. p. 445, No. 67, is published a Greek inscription from Assouan of the time of M. Aurelius, which begins—MeyaAy τύχῃ τοῦ [θε]ο[ῦ. . . τ]ῶν ἀνγέλων τῆς [ἱ]ερεί[ας] : cf. alsop. 451 No. 94 (time of Diocletian), Ὑπὲρ εὐχῆς τῶν ἀνγέλων ’Epeonvol ἀνέθηκαν | κτὰ. Οἱ ἄγγελοι θεοῦ, as in 1 Tim 54, occurs in the extremely interesting Jewish inscription Sy// 816'° κύριε Oo | πάντα ἐ[φ)ορῶν kal οἱ ἄνγελοι θεοῦ. Dittenberger assigns it to i/A.D. and yet…
Read the full entry →ἄγγελος (angelos) — angel.
ἄγγελος, ὁ, ἡ,
messenger, envoy, [Refs 8th c.BC+] — proverbial, Ἀράβιος ἄ., of a loquacious person, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. generally, one that announces or tells, e.g. of birds of augury, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Μουσῶν ἄγγελος, of a poet, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἄ. ἄφθογγος, of a beacon, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; of the nightingale, ὄρνις.. Διὸς ἄ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. angel, [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+]
4. in later philosophical, semi-divine being, ἡλιακοὶ ἄ.[Refs 4th c.AD+] in R.2.243 K.; ἄ. καὶ ἀρχάγγελοι[Refs 5th c.AD+]: also in mystical and magical writings, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. title of Artemis at Syracuse, [Refs 5th c.AD+]
ἄγγελος (angelos) — angel: messenger.
ἄγγελος, ὁ, ἡ,
ἄγγελος
aggelos
from aggello (probably derived from 71; compare 34) (to bring
tidings); a messenger; especially an "angel"; by implication, a
pastor:--angel, messenger.
see GREEK for 71
see GREEK for 34
ἄγγελος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
an angel, messenger
ἀγγέλλω angellō 1x
to tell, to announce, Jn. 20:18*
ἄγγελος a messenger, envoy, Hom., Hdt., attic
generally, one that announces, of birds of augury, Il.; Μουσῶν ἄγγελος, of a poet, Theogn.; Διὸς ἄγγ., of the nightingale, Soph.; c. gen. rei, ἄγγ. κακῶν ἐμῶν id. Soph.
a divine messenger, an angel, NTest.
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
an'-jel (mal'akh; Septuagint and New Testament, aggelos):
I. DEFINITION AND SCRIPTURE TERMS
II. ANGELS IN OLD TESTAMENT
1. Nature, Appearances and Functions
2. The Angelic Host
3. The Angel of the Theophany
III. ANGELS IN NEW TESTAMENT
1. Appearances
2. The Teaching of Jesus about Angels
3. Other New Testament References
IV. DEVELOPMENT OF THE DOCTRINE
V. THE REALITY OF ANGELS
LITERATURE
I. Definition and Scripture Terms.
The word angel is applied in Scripture to an order of supernatural or heavenly beings whose business it is to act as God's messengers to men, and as agents who carry out His will. Both in Hebrew and Greek the word is applied to human messengers (1Ki 19:2; Lu 7:24); in Hebrew it is used in the singular to denote a Divine messenger, and in the plural for human messengers…
Angel
A word signifying, both in the Hebrew and Greek, a “messenger,” and hence employed to denote any agent God sends forth to execute his purposes. It is used of an ordinary messenger (Job 1:14: 1 Sam. 11:3; Luke 7:24; 9:52), of prophets (Isa. 42:19; Hag. 1:13), of priests (Mal. 2:7), and ministers of the New Testament (Rev. 1:20).
It is also applied to such impersonal agents as the pestilence (2 Sam. 24:16, 17;
The original word, both in Hebrew and Greek, means messenger, and is so translated, Mt 11:10 Lu 7:24. It is often applied to an ordinary messenger, Job 1:14 1Sa 11:3 Lu 9:52; to prophets, Isa 42:19 Hag 1:13; to priests, Ec 5:6 Mal 2:7; and even to inanimate objects, Ps 78:49 104:4 2Co 12:7. Under the…
184 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 176 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 119 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„ὁ θεός, ᾧ εὐηρέστησαν οἱ πατέρες μου Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαάκ, ὁ θεὸς ὁ τρέφων με ἐκ νεότητος ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης, ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ ῥυόμενός με ἐκ πάντων τῶν κακῶν, εὐλογήσαι τὰ παιδία ταῦτα“ (Gen.
πολλοὶ γὰρ ἄγγελοι θεοῦ γυναιξὶ συνιόντες ὑβριστὰς ἐγέννησαν παῖδας καὶ παντὸς ὑπερόπτας καλοῦ διὰ τὴν ἐπὶ τῇ δυνάμει πεποίθησιν·
ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡ περιτομή, ἐφ̓ ᾗ πεποίθασιν, κατήργηται, περιτομὴν γὰρ εἴρηκεν οὐ σαρκὸς γενηθῆναι: ἀλλὰ παρέβησαν, ὅτι ἄγγελος πονηρὸς ἐσόφιζεν αὐτούς.
τὸ ἐφόδιον, ὅπως ἂν ἀνακομισθῶ πρὸς αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ δοκῆι με αὐτοῦ καταρρᾳθυμεῖν. καὶ ἄγγελόν μοι ἀπέστειλε καλῶν με. σὺ οὖν μοι τί συντάσσεις; εὐτύχει.
τὸν σταχθέντα ἐνιαύσιον χρόνον· καὶ ἐμοῦ ται τε Κορνηλίου ἀποπληρώσαντος καθʼ ὁμοιότητα καὶ ἐγὼ ἀγγελῶ τὸν ὁμογνήσιον σοῦ ἀδελφὸν Διόσκορον τῷ ἑξῆς ἔτει ἐκτελοῦντα καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν αὐτὸν ἐνιαύσιον
α … ατερα … α … ω … ταύταις ταῖς φωναῖς ἐχρήσατο ὁ ἄγγελος τοῦ θεοῦ μου ὁ ῥυσάμενός με ἐκ πάντων τῶν κακῶν μου. διό, γνήσιε τέκνον
The Greek word ἐξέρχομαι, transliterated as exerchomai, is built from the prefix ἐξ meaning 'out of' and the root ἔρχομαι meaning 'to come' or 'to go.' It generally means to go or come out of a place, and can also refer to escaping, departing, or proceeding. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including the expulsion of demons and the release of prisoners.
ἐξ-έρχομαι,
[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for יצא, also for עלה ,בֹּוא, etc. ;]
depon.,
ἐξέρχομαι ; impf. eEnpyounv; fut. ἐξελεύσομαι; 2 aor. ἐξῆλθον, plur. 2 pers. ἐξήλθετε, 3 pers. ἐξῆλθον, and in LT Tr WH the Atex. forms (see ἀπέρχομαι, init.) ἐξήλGare (Mt. xi. 7, 8,9; xxvi.55; Mk. xiv. 48, ete.), ἐξῆλθαν (1 Jn. ii. 19; 2Jn. 7 [here Tdf. -Ao0v; 3 Jn. 7, ete.]); pe. ἐξελήλυθα;: plpf. ἐξεληλύθειν (Lk. viii. 38, ete.) ; Sept. for N¥? times without number ; to go or come out of; 1. properly; a. with mention of the place out of which one goes, or of the point from which he departs; a. of those who leave a place of their own accord: with the gen. alone, Mt. x.14 (1, Τ Tr WH insert ἔξω) ; Acts xvi. 39RG. foll. by ἐκ : Mk. v. 2; vii. 31; Jn. iv. 30; viii. 59; Acts vii. 3 sq.; 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xviii. 4, ete. foll. by ἔξω with gen. — with addition of εἰς and ace. of place, Mt. xxi. 17; Mk. xiv. 68; or παρά with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 13; or πρός twa, ace. of pers., Heb. xiii.…
Read the full entry →ἐξέρχομαι. For this verb in its ordinary sense it is sufficient to cite P Oxy II. 282" (a complaint against a wife—a.D. 30-35) kata πέρ[α]ς ἐξῆλθε] kal ἀπηνέκαντο (/. —éyKavto) τὰ ἡμέτερα, ‘finally she left the house and they carried off my belongings,” 26. III. 472! (c. A.D. 130) ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκείνου οἰκίας ἐξεληλύθει, 25. 5287 (ii/a.D.) ἀφ᾽ ὡς ἐκξῆλθες (1. €E—) ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ πένθος ἡγούμην, ‘‘ever since you Jeft me I have been in mourning” (Edd.): cf. for the constr. with ἀπό, Lk 55. P Oxy I. 1128 (iii/iv A.D.) δήλωσόν por ἢ πλοίῳ éépx [et] ἢ ὄνῳ shows the verb followed by the instrumental dat.: cf. Jn 21%. For ἐξέρχομαι of the driving forth of demons, as in Mk 178 a/., cf. the magical P Par 5741248 (ili/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 114) ἔξελθε, Satpov,. . . Kal ἀπόστηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ 8(e)i(va), and for the verb followed by ἔπί cf. P Tebt 11. 283° (B.c. 93 or 60) ἐξελήλυθεν ἐπὶ τὴν + + μητέρα pov, “‘made…
Read the full entry →ἐξέρχομαι (exerchomai) — to go out.
ἐξέρχομαι,
future -ελεύσομαι (but in Attic dialect ἔξειμι (A) supplies the future, also imperfect ἐξῄειν): aorist 2 ἐξῆλθον, the only tense used in [Refs 8th c.BC+]:— go or come out of, with genitive loci, τείχεος, πυλάων, πόληος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐ. δωμάτων, χθονός, etc., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of an actor, come out on the stage, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, come forth, ἐ. καὶ ἀμῦναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]
__b rarely with accusative, ἐξῆλθον τὴν Περσίδα χώραν [LXX+5th c.BC+]
__c absolutely, march out, go forth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__d of an accused person, withdraw from the country to avoid trial, opposed to φεύγω, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
ἐξέρχομαι
exerchomai
from 1537 and 2064; to issue (literally or figuratively):--come
(forth, out), depart (out of), escape, get out, go (abroad, away,
forth, out, thence), proceed (forth), spread abroad.
see GREEK for 1537
see GREEK for 2064
ἐξέρχομαι
v.
I go out, come out
ἐξέρχομαι exerchomai 218x
to go or come out of; to come out, Mt. 5:26; 8:34; to proceed, emanate, take rise from, Mt. 2:6; 15:18; 1 Cor. 14:36; to come abroad, 1 Jn. 4:1; to go forth, go away, depart, Mt. 9:31; Lk. 5:8; to escape, Jn. 10:39; to pass away, come to an end, Acts 16:19
ἐξέρχομαι fut. -ελεύσομαι in attic ἔξειμι supplies the fut., as also the imperf. ἐξῄειν aor2 ἐξῆλθον Dep.:— to go or come out of, c. gen. loci, Hom., Hdt., etc.; of an actor, to come out on the stage, Ar.:—also c. acc., ἐξ. τὴν χώρην Hdt.:—absol. to go away, march off, Il.: also, to march out, go forth, ἐπί τινα Hdt.:—c. acc. cogn. to go out on an expedition, Xen.: to go through a work, Soph.
ἐξ. εἰς ἔλεγχον to stand forth and come to the trial, Eur.: to turn out so and so, Soph.
c. acc. rei, to execute, Thuc.
of Time, to come to an end, expire, Hdt., Soph.
of prophecies, dreams, events, to be accomplished, come true, Hdt.; ὀρθὸν ἐξ. to come out right, Soph.; μὴ ἐξέλθῃ σαφής lest he turn out a true prophet, id. Soph.
Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singularsecond aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
220 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 85 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 217 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 332 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
"ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου“ (Gen.
ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.
νῦν δὲ ὅ λέγει: τὰ φύλλα οὐκ ἀπορυήσεται, τοῦτο λέγει: ὅτι πᾶν ῥῆμα, ὃ ἐὰν ἐξελεύσεται ἐξ ὑμῶν διὰ τοῦ στόματος ὑμῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ, ἔσται εἰς ἐπιστροφὴν καὶ ἐλπίδα πολλοῖς.
Σωκράτης Ἀθηνοδώρῳ καὶ Ἀμμωνίῳ ἀμφοτέροις χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσετε ἐξελθόντες εἰς Τιβεριανὴν στομώσαντες τὰ σιδήρια τῶν σκληρουργῶν. ἄχρηστα γὰρ πάντα τὰ σιδήρια ἅπαξ ἵνα
τιμιωτάτοις χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσετε ἐπεὶ οἱ σκληρουργοὶ λέγουσίν μοι ὅτι οὐχ εἰσερχόμεθα ἔσω στομῶντες ἐξελθόντες στομώσατε. καὶ γράφετε ἡμᾶς ἀργεῖν. ἐκ δύο τὸ … ἓν δρᾶ, ἵνα στομώσητε ἢ
σφῆνας εὐχαριστοῦμεν αὐτοῖς. βέβληται καὶ ἐπιβεβλήμεθα … τὴν πλάκα. εἰ οὖν θέλεις ἵνα ἀπαρτισθῇ, ἔξελθε στομώσειν αὐτοῖς καὶ ἆρον αὐτῶν τὴν πρόφασιν μετὰ δύο σφυροκόπων Μα … Μωνισπος
The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.
ἐκ (ἐξ),
prep. c. gen.,
from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).
ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,
prep. c. gen.,
of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.
Of Place,
ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…
Read the full entry →ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…
Read the full entry →ἐκ (ek) — out from.
ἐκ,
before a vowel ἐξ, also
__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.
__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:
__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]
ἐκ
ek
or ex ex
a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or
motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or
figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,
betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),
for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X
heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,
off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,
through,
X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,
with the same general import; often of completion.
ἐκ, ἐξ
Prep.
from out, out from among, from
ἐκ ek 915x
ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →
ἐκ
ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:
out of, from. c. gen.
OF PLACE:
of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.
to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.
to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.
of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.
with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ναός (naos) refers to a temple or shrine, specifically the inner sanctuary where a deity resides. In the New Testament, it often denotes the temple in Jerusalem, distinguishing it from the larger temple complex. It is also used metaphorically for Christians as the dwelling place of the Spirit of God. Notably, there is a distinction between ναός and ἱερόν, the latter referring to the entire temple area.
WE have in our Version only the one word ‘temple’ for both of these; nor is it easy to perceive in what manner we could have marked the distinction between them; which is yet a very real one, and one the marking of which would often add much to the clearness and precision of the sacred narrative (see Fuller, A Pisgah Sight of Palestine, p. 427). ὑἹερόν (=templum) is the whole com8ὃπι.:. SYNONYMS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. Il pass of the sacred enclosure, the τέμενος, including the outer courts, the porches, porticoes, and other buildings subordinated to the temple itself; αἱ οἰκοδομαὶ τοῦ ἱεροῦ (Matt. xxiv. 1). But ναός (= ‘ edes’) from ναίω, “ habito,’ as the proper habitation of God (Acts vii. 48; xvii. 24; I Cor. vi. 19); the οἶκος τοῦ Θεοῦ (Matt. xii. 4; cf. Exod. Xxill. 19), the German ‘duom’ or ‘ domus,’ is the temple itself, that by especial right so called, being the heart and centre…
Read the full entry →ναός, -ov, ὁ, (ναίω to dwell), Sept. for Danity used of the temple at Jerusalem, but only of the sacred edifice (or sanctuary) itself, consisting of the Holy place and the Holy of holies (in class. Grk. used of the sanctuary or cell of a temple, where the image of the go | was placed, called also δόμος, σηκός, which is to be distinguished from τὸ ἱερόν, the whole temple, the entire consecrated enclosure; this distinction is observed also in the Bible; see ἱερόν, p. 299°): Mt. xxiii. 16 sq. 35; xxvii. 40; Mk. xiv. 58; xv. 29; Jn.ii. 19sq.; Rev. xi. 2; nor need Mt. xxvii. 5 be regarded as an exception, provided we suppose that Judas in his desperation entered the Holy place, which no one but the priests was allowed to enter [ (note the εἰς (al. ἐν) of TTrWH)]. with θεοῦ, rod θεοῦ, added: Mt. xxvi. 61; 1 Co. iii. 17; 2 Co. vi. 16; 2 Th. ii. 4; Rey. xi. 1; used specifically of the Holy…
Read the full entry →ναός (naos) — temple.
νᾱός, ὁ,
Doric dialect, Thess., etc. form, [Refs 5th c.BC+], rare in Attic dialect Prose and Comedy texts, [LXX+5th c.BC+] only in 2 Ma.), [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; Ionic dialectνηός, always in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative νειῴ [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Attic dialect νεώς (Attic Inscrr. of see-3rd c.BC (see. below), once in Trag. (see. above), frequently in Prose authors and found in Comedy texts (see. below)); declension, nominative νεώς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; dative νεῴ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative νεών [LXX+5th c.BC+]; on the accent see Hdn.Gr.1.8: Aeolic dialect ναῦος [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Spartan ναϝός [prev. work]5(1).1564 (plural, found at Delos, 5th-4th c.BC):—temple, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
II. inmost part of a temple, shrine containing the image of the god, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
III. portable shrine carried in processions, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
ναός
naos
from a primary naio (to dwell); a fane, shrine, temple :--shrine,
temple. Compare 2411.
see GREEK for 2411
ναός, οῦ, ὁ
n.m.
a temple, shrine
ναός naos 45x
pr. a dwelling; the dwelling of a deity, a temple, Mt. 26:61; Acts 7:48; used figuratively of individuals, Jn. 2:19; 1 Cor. 3:16; spc. the cell of a temple; hence, the Holy Place of the Temple of Jerusalem, Mt. 23:35; Lk. 1:9; a model of a temple, a shrine, Acts 19:24
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
tem'-p'l (hekhal, "palace"; sometimes, as in 1Ki 6:3,5, etc.; Eze 41:1,15 ff, used for "the holy place" only; bayith, "house," thus always in the Revised Version (British and American); hieron, naos):
A. STRUCTURE AND HISTORY
I. SOLOMON'S TEMPLE
I. INTRODUCTORY
1. David's Project
2. Plans and Preparations
3. Character of the Building
4. Site of the Temple
5. Phoenician Assistance
II. THE TEMPLE BUILDING
1. In General
2. Dimensions, Divisions and Adornments
3. The Side-Chambers
4. The Porch and Pillars
III. COURTS, GATES ANY ROYAL BUILDINGS
1. The Inner Court
(1) Walls
(2) Gates
2. The Great Court
3. The Royal Buildings
IV. FURNITURE OF THE TEMPLE
1. The Sanctuary
(1) The "Debhir"
(2) The "Hekhal"
2. The Court (Inner)
(1) The Altar
(2) The Molten (Bronze) Sea
(3) The Layers and Their Bases
Temple
First used of the tabernacle, which is called “the temple of the Lord” (1 Sam. 1:9). In the New Testament the word is used figuratively of Christ’s human body (John 2:19, 21). Believers are called “the temple of God” (1 Cor. 3:16, 17). The Church is designated “an holy temple in the Lord” (Eph. 2:21). Heaven is also called a temple (Rev. 7:5). We read also of the heathen “temple of the great goddess Diana” (Acts 19:27).
There is perhaps no building of the ancient world which has excited so much attention since the time of its destruction as the temple which Solomon built by Herod. Its spoils were considered worthy of forming the principal illustration of one of the most beautiful of Roman triumphal arches, and Justinian’s highest architectural ambition was that he might surpass it. Throughout the middle ages it influenced to a considerable degree the forms of Christian churches, and its peculiarities were the watchwords and rallying-points of all associations of builders. When the French expedition to Egypt, int he first years of this century, had made the world familiar with the wonderful architectural remains of that country, every one jumped to the conclusion that Solomon’s temple must have been designed after an Egyptian model. The discoveries in Assyria by Botta and Layard have within the last…
A building hallowed by the special presence of God, and consecrated to his worship. The distinctive idea of a temple, contrasted with all other buildings, is that it is the dwelling-place of a deity; and every heathen temple had its idol, but the true and living God dwelt "between the cherubim" in the Holy of Holies at Jerusalem. Hence, figuratively applied, a temple denotes the church of Christ, 2Th 2:4 Re 3:12; heaven, Ps 11:4 Re 7:15; and the soul of the believer, in which the Holy Spirit dwells, 1Co 3:16,17 6:19 2Co 6:16.
46 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 45 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 41 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
περὶ τῆς σκηνῆς ἣν κατεσκεύασε Μωυσῆς ἐν τῇ ἐρημίᾳ εἰς τιμὴν τοῦ θεοῦ, ὥστε ναὸν εἶναι δοκεῖν.
γενώμεθα πνευματικοί, γενώμεθα ναὸς τέλειος τῷ θεῷ.
ἐπ’ ἀληθείας ταχὺ καὶ ἐξαίφνης τελειωθήσεται τὸ βούλημα αὐτοῦ, συνεπιμαρτυρούσης καὶ τῆς γραφῆς, ὅτι ταχὺ ἥξει καὶ οὐ χρονιεῖ, καὶ ἐξαίφνης ἥξει ὁ κύριος εἰς τὸν ναὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ὁ ἅγιος, ὃν ὑμεῖς προσδοκᾶτε.
1 ἐκ δὲ τῶν ἀπολειπομένων δύο , τόν τε ναόν μου παρῃτησάμην, διὰ τὸ θεοῖς μόνοις δ ταύτην τὴν τιμὴν ὑπʼ ἀνθρώπων δικαίως ἀπονέμεσθαι,
καὶ διὰ παντὸς ὑγιαίνειν. ἠγόρακά σοι τὰς ἐλαίας. αἰτοῦσι πανταχόθεν εἰς τὴν εὐσέβειαν τοῦ ναοῦ Σούχου, πάντας ἀνθρώπους, καὶ Ῥωμαίους καὶ Ἀλεξανδρεῖς καὶ κατοικοῦντας ἐν τῶι Ἀρσινοΐτηι. αἰτοῦσι Πομπήιον.
ε … τος … παστοφόρων Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου καὶ … θεοῦ ἐπηκόου καὶ ναοῦ Καίσαρος Θεοῦ Σεβαστοῦ … περι … … … … … … θ
The Greek word κράζω (i.e., *krazo*) primarily means to cry out or scream, often associated with loud, inarticulate sounds like those of a raven. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including cries for help, expressions of vengeance, and public teaching. The word is built from a root meaning 'to croak' and covers a range of vocal expressions, from urgent pleas to proclamations.
κράζω (with a long; hence ptep. κρᾶζον, Gal. iv. 6 L T Tr WH [(where RG κράζον); cf. Β. 61 (53)]); impf. éxpa(ov; fut. κεκράξομαι (Lk. xix. 40 RGLTr mrg.), and κράξω (ibid. T WH Trtxt.), the former being more com. in Grk. writ. and used by the Sept. (ef. Mie. iii. 4; Job xxxv. 12, ete. [but ἀνα-κράξομαι;, Joel iii. 16 Alex.; ef. W. 279 (262); esp. B. as below]); 1 aor. ἔκραξα (once viz. Acts xxiv. 21 TTr WH ἐκέκραξα, a reduplicated form freq. in Sept. [e. g. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 6; Judg. iii. 15, 1 Mace. xi. 49, ete.; see Veitch s. v.]; more com. in native Grk. writ. is 2 aor. €kpayov[“ the sim ple ἔκραγον seems not to occur in good Attic” (Veitch s. v.)]); pf. kexpaya, with pres. force [W. 274 (258)] (Jn. i. 15); cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 223; B.61 (53); Kiihner i. p. 851; [esp. Veitch 5. v.]; Sept. for pst, PLY, NIP, paw; [fr. Aeschyl. down]; 1. prop. [onomatopoetic] fo croak (Germ.…
Read the full entry →κράζω occurs gwzafer in the general sense of ‘‘cry οὐδ᾽ in a late i/B.C. petition, P Oxy IV. 717, e.g. 1 ἐκβοῶντος δέ μου Kal κράζοντος τὰ τοσαῦτα: cf. P Fay 119% (c. A.D. 100) ἐπὶ κράζει ΠΙᾶσις εἵνα μὴ cis ψωμὶν (for ψωμίον) γένηται διὰ τὼ ὕδωρ, ‘for Pasis is crying out that we must not allow it (sc. manure) to be dissolved by the water ’’ (Edd.), BGU III. 816% (ili/A.D.) ἐπὶ κράσι (/. ἐπεὶ κράζει) ᾿Απᾶς Evayyédos (Δ του) περὶ τοῦ χαλκοῦ. For κέκραγα as a perfect with present force in Jn 11° see Pro/eg. p. 147, and to the LXX exx. there adduced add Aenandrea p. 444 τὸ παιδίον κεκpayds, ‘‘the baby screaming,” and so 20. 4524. The verb, which survives in ΜΟΥ, is discussed by Abbott Joh. Gr. p. 348.
κράζω (krazō) — to cry.
κράζω,
not common in present, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.: future κεκράξομαι [NT+5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἔκραξα [LXX+4th c.BC+]; ἐκέκραξα frequently in [LXX]aorist 2 ἔκρᾰγον (ἀν[LXX+5th c.BC+]perfect with present sense, κέκρᾱγα (see. below) (late κέκρᾰγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἐκεκράγειν [Refs 8th c.BC+], croak, of the raven, [Refs 5th c.BC+], Thphr. [prev. cited]; of frogs, κεκραξόμεσθα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: generally, scream, shriek, cry, σὺ δ᾽ αὖ κέκραγας [Refs 4th c.BC+]; bawl, shout, κεκραγὼς καὶ βοῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κεκραγέναι πρός τινα to call to.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with accusative cognate, μέλος κέκραγα [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποίου (i.e. περὶ ποίου) κέκραγας ἀνδρὸς ὧδ᾽ ὑπέρφρον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—rare in early Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.; ἐκεκράγει ὅτι.. [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; κεκράγασιν ὡς.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with accusative et infinitive [Refs 5th…
Read the full entry →κράζω
krazo
a primary verb; properly, to "croak" (as a raven) or scream, i.e.
(genitive case) to call aloud (shriek, exclaim, intreat):--cry (out).
κράζω
v.
I cry aloud, shriek
κράζω root isΚΡΑΓ, as in aor2 to croak, of frogs, Ar.: generally, to scream, shriek, cry aloud, Aesch., Ar.; κέκραχθι Ar.; κραγὸν κεκράξεται will bawl aloud, id. Ar. (κραγόν being aor2 part. used adverbially).
c. acc. rei, to clamour for a thing, id. Ar.
Verb-PAP-NSM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
V-PAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
56 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 55 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 55 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
μονονοὺ γὰρ βοᾷ καὶ κέκραγεν, ὅτι τῶν εἰς τὸ θεῖον βλασφημούντων οὐδενὶ συγγνώμης μεταδοτέον.
τῶν … ων καὶ ὁ ἐν τῆι παρεμβολῆι χωλὸς δούς σοι τὰς τρεῖς λεκτίκας κράζει λέγων οὐδὲν ἄλλο τι ἢ ἐνιαύσιος χρόνος, ἀφʼ οὗ ἔλαβες … καὶ οὐκ ἔπεμψας
τῶι συνεδρίῳ εὑρίσκω αὐτὸ εἶναι μείζω δύο ταῖς ἑκατόν . ἐγὼ οὖν ἐβόων καὶ ἔκραζον … ερον τὸ χαλκοῦν ἄδικόν ἐστι καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιον … ἐν τῶι συνεδρίῳ
Ἰσχυρᾶς Παραβόλῳ χαίρειν. ἔλαβα ἄρτων ζεύγη με. πέμψον τὸν πρίoνα ὅτι κράζει Μένανδρος. ἔρρωσο.
The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.
ἐν,
prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).
Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…
Read the full entry →ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…
Read the full entry →ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…
Read the full entry →ἐν (en) — in/on/among.
ἐν,
poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]
__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.
__A WITH DAT.
__A.I OF PLACE,
__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…
ἐν
en
a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or
state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or
constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519
and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +
almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+
all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,
-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,
one, X quickly,
X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),
through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,
with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same
import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate
direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)
preposition.
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 1537
ἐν
Prep.
in, on, among
ἐν en 2x
followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of,
ἐν
e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.
Lat. in.
PREP. WITH DAT.:
OF PLACE
in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.
in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.
in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.
in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.
in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…
2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
φωνή is a feminine noun meaning 'voice' or 'sound,' primarily associated with articulate sounds made by humans and animals. It can also refer to sounds from inanimate objects and encompasses speech, language, and tones. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, such as in Matthew 2:18 and John 3:8. Notably, the lexicons differ on whether it can apply to inanimate sounds, with some sources emphasizing its primary association with living beings.
On these words, and on their relation to one another, very much has been written by the Greek grammarians and natural philosophers (see Lersch, Sprachphilosophie der Alten, vol. iii. pp. 85, 45, and passim). Φωνή, from φάω, ds φωτίζουσα τὸ νοούμενον (Plutarch, De Plac. Phil. 19), rendered in our Version ‘ voice’ (Matt. ii. 18), ‘sound’ (John iii. 8), ‘noise’ (Rev. vi. 1), is distinguished from ψόφος, in that it is the cry of a living creature (ἡ δὲ φωνὴ ψόφος τίς ἐστιν ἐμψύχου, Aristotle, De Anima, 2. 8. 14), being sometimes ascribed to God (Matt. ui. 17), to men (Matt. iii. 3), to animals (Rev. ix. 9), and, though improperly, to inanimate objects as well (1 Cor. xiv. 7), as to the trumpet (Matt. xxiv. 31), to the wind (John iii. 8), to the thunder (Rev. vi. 1; οἵ. Ps. lxxvi. 19). But λόγος, a word, saying, or rational utterance of the νοῦς, whether spoken (προφορικός, and thus φωνὴ τῶν…
Read the full entry →φωνή, -ῆς, ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for קוֺל ;]
a voice;
prop., of persons, Mt 2:18 (LXX), al.; φ. αἴρειν (ἐπαίρειν), Lk 17:13, Ac 2:14, al.; φ. μεγάλῃ εἰπεῖν (λέγειν, φωνεῖν, etc.), Lk 8:28, Ac 7:57, Re 5:12, al.; γίνεται (ἔρχεται) φ. ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν (ἐξ οὐρανοῦ), Mk 1:11, Lk 3:22, Jo 12:28, al. (cf. DCG, ii, 810a; Dalman, Words, 204 f.); ἀκούειν φωνήν (-ῆς; v.s. ἀκούω), Ac 9:4, 7 al.; φ.…
φωνή, -ἢς, ἡ, (φάω to shine, make clear, [ef. Curtius §407; L. and S.s. v. φάω]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. Tips 1. a sound, tone: of inanimate things, as of musical instruments, Mt. xxiv. 31 [T om. ¢., WH give it only in mrg.; ef. B. § 132, 10]; 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq.; Rev. xiv. 2; xviii. 22, (Is. xviii. 3; xxiv. 8; Sir. 1.16; 1 Mace. v. 313 ὀργάνων, Plat. de rep. 3 p. 397 ἃ. ; συρίγγων, Eur. Tro. 127; ψαλτηρίου καὶ αὐλοῦ, Plut. mor. p. 713 ¢.); of wind, Jn. iii. 8; Acts ii. 6; of thunder, Rev. vi. 1; xiv. 2; xix. 6, cf. iv. 5; viii. 5; xi. 19; xvi. 18; noise, of a millstone, Rev. xviii. 22; of a thronging multitude, Rev. xix. 1, 6; of chariots, Rev. ix. 9; of wings, whir (Ezek. i. 24), ibid.; of waters (Ezek. i. 24; 4 Esdr. vi. 17), Rev. i. 15; xiv. 2; xix. 6; also with the gen. of a thing implying speech, the sound [A.V. voice]: τοῦ ἀσπασμοῦ, Lk. i. 445 ῥημάτων, Heb. xii. 19; the cry (of men)…
Read the full entry →φωνή, «ἐᾷ sound,” ‘fa voice”: cf P Lond 191257 (A.D. 41) γνησιωτέραις ὑμᾶς φωναῖς προσαγορεύσας, * addressing you more frankly by word of mouth,” P Ryl II. 77% (A.D. 192) ἔχομεν δὴ φωνὴν τοῦ ᾿Ασπιδᾶ, ““ννὲ now have the declaration of Aspidas” (Edd.). In one of the family letters of Paniskos (iii/iv A.D.) from the Michigan papyri edited by J. G. Winter in the Journ. Egypt. Arch. xiii. p. 721 we find wodAdkt[s] φωνὴν αὐ[τῷ] ἐβά[λομ]εν ἵνα ἔλ[θῃ] πρὸς τὸν ἐπανορθωτὴ(ν) ᾿Αχιλλ[έα, ““ννε sent him word repeatedly that he might come to the epanorthotes Achilles” —a phrase for which the editor can find no parallel. For the power of the divine voice cf. Wiinsch 4/ p. 23° (1,4...) διὰ φωνῆς προστάγματος, where the editor compares Ps 32 αὐτὸς εἶπεν, καὶ ἐγενήθησαν. The word is used of Coptic speech in P Lond 7718 (end vi/A.D.) (=I. p. 232) τῇ τῶν Αἰγυπτίων φωνῇ : cf. also P Giss I. 4oll- 27 (A.D.…
Read the full entry →φωνή (phōnē) — voice/sound: voice.
φων-ή, ἡ,
sound, tone, properly, the sound of the voice, whether of men or animals with lungs and throat (ἡ φωνὴ ψόφος τίς ἐστιν ἐμψύχου [Refs 4th c.BC+]; opposed to φθόγγος (see. φθόγγος [Refs]
I. mostly of human beings, speech, voice, utterance, φ. ἄρρηκτος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φ. δέ οἱ αἰθέρ᾽ ἵκανεν, of Ajax' battle-cry, [Refs]; of the battle-cry of an army, Τρώων καὶ Ἀχαιῶν.. φ. δεινὸν ἀϋσάντων [Refs]: plural, of the cries of market-people, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀξεῖα, βαρυτέρα, λεία, τραχεῖα φ., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μιαρά, ἀναιδής, [Refs 5th c.BC+]with his voice, aloud, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μιᾷ φ. with one voice, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ἀπὸ φωνῆς, with genitive, dictated by.., [Refs 4th c.AD+] in Euc.Dat.p.234 M., [Refs 4th c.BC+] the notes of the voice, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πᾶσαν, τὸ λεγόμενον, φ. ἱέντα…
φωνή
phone
probably akin to 5316 through the idea of disclosure; a tone
(articulate, bestial or artificial); by implication, an address (for
any purpose), saying or language:--noise, sound, voice.
see GREEK for 5316
φωνή, ῆς, ἡ
n.f.
a sound, noise, voice
φωνή φωνή, ἡ, φάω a sound, tone, properly the sound of the voice, mostly of men, Lat. vox, Hom., etc.; of a battlecry, Xen.; φωνὴν ῥηγνύναι, Virgil's rumpere vocem, to utter an articulate sound, Hdt., Ar.; φ. ἱέναι, Lat. vocem edere, Hdt., etc.: pl. αἱ φ. the tones of the voice, Plat.:—proverb., φωνῇ ὁρᾶν, of a blind man, Soph.
the voice or cry of animals, Od., Hdt., etc.
any articulate sound, as opp. to inarticulate (ψόφος), Soph., etc.
of sounds from inanimate objects, φ. συρίγγων Eur.; ὀργάνων Plat.
the faculty of speech, discourse, Lat. sermo, Soph.
language, Lat. lingua, Hdt.
a kind of language, dialect, Aesch., Thuc., etc.
a phrase, saying, τὴν Σιμωνίδου φ. Plat.
Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
141 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 139 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 302 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
χρώματα μὲν [ἡ] ὅρασις, φωνὰς δὲ ἀκοή, χυλοὺς δὲ γεῦσις, καὶ ὄσφρησις ἀτμούς, μαλακότητας δὲ καὶ σκληρότητας καὶ ὅσα θερμὰ ἢ ψυχρὰ λειότητάς τε καὶ τραχύτητας ἁφή.
ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.
Λέγει οὖν πάλιν περὶ τούτων πρὸς αὐτούς: Ἱνατί μοι νηστεύετε, λέγει κύριος, ὡς σήμερον ἀκουσθῆναι ἐν κραυγῇ τὴν φωνὴν ὑμῶν;
φ … … σατε … το γρ … … … πρ … φωνη ἐστι τω … εισγραπτ … … ος ὁ στρατηγός· ἄλλον ἀντʼ αὐτοῦ δότε.
σχολάζεις τηρεῖν τὰ ἐκεῖ καὶ ἁρπάζεται ὑπὸ τῶν παραγόντων. ἂν οὐχ εὑρίσκεις ἀποδοῦναι τὴν φωνήν ὡς εἶπας αὐτῷ … … ι ἐμφανής. καὶ πότε θέλεις γένηται ἀμμὰς πρὸς σέ;
μιᾶς νωνῶν … ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ. μετʼ ἄλλα. Καῖσαρ σκεψάμενος μετὰ τῶν φίλων τῇ πατρίῳ φωνῇ ἀπεφήνατο, ἀναγνοὺς ἐκ βιβλίου, οἱ μὲν ἐπίτροποι ἡμῶν ἕξουσιν διὰ φροντίδος μισθοῦν τὰ τέλη
μέγας is an adjective meaning 'great' or 'large,' used to describe size, intensity, or importance. It can refer to physical dimensions, such as a stone or city, or to abstract qualities like love or fear. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including Matthew 2:10 and Revelation 11:8. The word has comparative and superlative forms: μείζων (greater) and μέγιστος (greatest).
μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, [(τοϊαϊοα to Lat. magnus, ADEE Goth. maist (cf. τὸ πλεῖστον), etc.; Vaniéek p. 682; Cur tius ὃ 462)], ace. μέγαν. μεγάλην, μέγα; plur. pokes ται, -a; comp. μείζων, -ον, (acc. πιᾶξο. and fem. μείζονα, once contr. μείζω, Jn. v. 36 [RG T WH, but L Tr μείζων (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 119)]; neut. plur. μείζονα, once contr. μείζω, Jn. i. 50 (51)) and pectorepos, 3 Jn. 4 (fr. the compar. μείζων), a poet. compar., on which see the remark quoted under ἐλαχιστότερος, cf. Matthiae § 136; superl. μέγιστος (found only in 2 Pet. i. 4); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for ὮΥΤΔ; also for 31; great; 1. predicated a. of the external form or sensible appearance of things (or of persons); in particular, of space and its dimensions, — as respects a. mass and weight: λίθος, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. xvi. 4; Rev. xviii. 21; ὄρος, Rey. viii. 8; ἀστήρ, ibid. 10; δράκων Rev. xii. 3,9; ἀετός, ibid. 14; δένδρον…
Read the full entry →μέγας (B.C. 112) (= Selections, p. 30) μεγαλοίυϊπρεπέστερον ἐγδεχθήτωι, ‘let him be received with special magnificence ” (Edd.), PSI V. 4818 (v/vi a.p.) Tavptvyos ὃ μεγαλοπρεπέστί(ατος), and P Amh II. 154° (vi/vii A.D.) τοῦ peyadoπρε(πεστάτου) χαρτουλαρίου, ‘the most magnificent secretary.” For the subst. as a title of address cf. P Oxy VIII. 1163* (v/a.D.) ἐρωτηθὶς παρὰ τῆς αὐτοῦ μεγαλοπρεπίας ὅσα ἐχρῆν ἀνεδίδαξα αὐ τ]ὸν περὶ τῆς ὑμετέρας μεγαλο| πρεπίας, ‘Son the inquiry of his magnificence I told him what was fitting about your magnificence,” 76. I. 155° (vi/A.D.) ἐπειδὴ αἱ προσκυνοῦσαι τὴν ὑμετέραν μεγαλοπρί(έπειαν) καὶ τὰ παιδία ἀρρωστοῦσιν, ὡς ἔθος ἔχει τὸ ὑμῶν μέγεθος χαρίζεσθαί μου τοῦ λογαρίου, ‘since your magnificence’s obedient servants and their children are ill, I hope your highness will excuse my account” (Edd.). | , μεγαλύνω. With the use of this verb in the pass. in Phil…
Read the full entry →μέγας (megas) — great.
μέγᾰς, μεγάλη [ᾰ], μέγα [ᾰ],
genitive μεγάλου, ης, ου, dative μεγάλῳ, ῃ, ῳ, accusative μέγᾰν, μεγάλην, μέγα [ᾰ]; dual μεγάλω, α, w; plural μεγάλοι, μεγάλαι, μεγάλα, etc.: the stem μεγάλο- is never used in singular nominative and accusative masculine and neuter, and only once in vocative masculine,
__A ὦ μεγάλε Ζεῦ [Refs 4th c.BC+]
__A.I big, of bodily size: frequently of stature, εἶδος.. μ. ἦν ὁράασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φῶτα μέγαν καὶ καλόν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φύσιν τίν᾽ εἶχε φράζ; Answ. μέγας [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.b full-grown, of age as shown by stature, νῦν δ᾽ ὅτε δὴ μ. εἰμί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later, elder of two persons of the same name, Wilcken [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Σκιπίων ὁ…
μέγας
megas
(including the prolonged forms, feminine megale, plural
megaloi, etc.; compare also 3176, 3187); big (literally or
figuratively, in a very wide application):--(+ fear) exceedingly,
great(-est), high, large, loud, mighty, + (be) sore (afraid), strong,
X to years.
see GREEK for 3176
see GREEK for 3187
μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα
Adj. & Comp.adv.
large, great
μέγας megas 243x
great, large in size, Mt. 27:60; Mk. 4:32; great, much, numerous, Mk. 5:11; Heb. 11:26; great, grown up, adult, Heb. 11:24; great, vehement, intense, Mt. 2:10; 28:8; great, sumptuous, Lk. 5:29; great, important, weighty, of high importance, 1 Cor. 9:11; 13:13; great, splendid, magnificent, Rev. 15:3; extraordinary, wonderful, 2 Cor.…
Read the full entry →μέγας Radic. sense, opp. to μικρός, σμικρός, big, great, of men's stature, tall, Hom.; of women, καλή τε μεγάλη τε Od.:—also, great, full-grown, of age as shewn by stature, id. Od., Aesch.
vast, high, οὐρανός, ὄρος, πύργος Hom.
vast, spacious, wide, πέλαγός, αἰγιαλός, etc., id. Hom.
of Degree, great, strong, mighty, of gods, id. Hom., etc.; μεγάλα θεά, of Demeter and Proserpine, Soph.; μέγας ηὐξήθη rose to greatness, Dem.; βασιλεὺς ὁ μέγας, i. e. the King of Persia, le grand monarque, Hdt.; βασιλεὺς μέγας Aesch.; ὁ μ. ἐπικληθεὶς Ἀντίοχος the Great, Polyb.
great, strong, violent, etc., ἄνεμος, λαῖλαψ Hom.; of properties, passions, etc., id. Hom., etc.
Adj-DSF — Adjective · dative · singular · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-DSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
246 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 243 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 340 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.
ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
καὶ θεοῦ Φιλοπάτορος Νέου καὶ θεοῦ Εὐεργέτου καὶ θεῶν Φιλομητόρων Σωτήρων, ἱεροῦ πώλου Ἴσιδος μεγάλης μητρὸς θεῶν, ἀθλοφόρου Βερενίκης Εὐεργέτιδος, κανηφόρου Ἀρσινόης Φιλαδέλφου, ἱερείας Ἀρσινόης Φιλοπάτορος τῶν ὄντων ἐν
μετὰ τὴν ἐκείνου τελευτὴν τῶν λοιπῶν κρατουσῶν, Ἀρίστων Ἀθηνοδότου τῶν ἀπὸ Διὸς πόλεως τῆς μεγάλης βιαιότερον ἐμβατεύσας εἰς τὸ δηλούμενον ἔδαφος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος καὶ εἰς τὰ συνκύροντα τούτωι ἐν
μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculinedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
wun.
See NUMBER.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
κάθημαι (kathemai) means to sit or be seated, and is used in various contexts including physical sitting, residing, or even metaphorically for remaining in a state. It appears in several New Testament verses such as Matthew 9:9 and Revelation 4:3. The word is derived from a combination of roots implying sitting down, and its usage spans both literal and figurative meanings.
κάθ-ημαι,
[in LXX chiefly for ישׁב;]
in cl. pres. and impf. only (prop. pf. and plpf. of καθέζομαι; cf. Bl., § 24), in LXX and NT fut. also, to sit, be seated: Mt 11:16 22:44(LXX), Mk 2:6, Jo 6:3, Ac 2:2, Ja 2:3 (on the vulgar imper. κάθου, v. Kennedy, Sources, 162), Re 4:3, al.; seq. prep. c. acc., ἐπί, Mt 9:9, Mk 2:14, Jo 12:15; παρά, Mt 13:1, Mk 10:46; περί, Mk 3:32, 34; πρός, Read the full entry →
κάθ-ημαι, 2 pers. sing. κάθῃ a later form for κάθησαι (Acts xxiii. 3), impv. κάθου for κάθησο [yet ef. Kiihner as below] (cf. Zob. ad Phryn. p. 359; Kriiger $38, 6 sq. i. p. 147; Kiihner § 301 i. p. 671; W. 8.14, 4; [B. 49 (42)]), [subjune. 2 pers. plur. κάθησθε, Lk. xxii. 30 Tr mrg.; but WH txt. καθῆσθε ; see Veitch 5. v.; Kriiger $38, 6, 1 (cf. καθίζω), inf. καθῆσθαι, ptep. καθήμενος; imp ἐκαθήμην; and once the rare [ef. Veitch p. 347] fut. καθήcopa, Lk. xxii. 30 T Tr txt. WH mrg. [so WH in Mt. xix. 28 also; cf. καθίζω, fin.]; (jar); a verb of which only the pres. and impf. are in use in class. Grk. [ef. B. 60 (52) ]; Sept. for 1; 1. to sit down, seat one’s self: foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place [ef. W. § 52, 4, 9], Mk. iv. 1; Lk. xxii. 55 [here T Tr WH pégos]; εἰς, Mk. xiii. 3 [B. § 147,16]; μετά w. gen. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 58; κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, i. 6. be a partner of my power, Mt.…
Read the full entry →κάθημαι. P Petr III. 42 H (8){31 (mid. iii/B.c.) ἡμέρας k ἐκάθητο, P Par 1811} κάτισον és (1. κάθησον ἕως) ἴδωμεν τί μέλλομεν ποιεῖν, BGU LV. 1141°3(B.c. 14) εὑρίσκῳωι αὐτὸν καθήμενοί(ν), 7b. 10788 (A.D. 39) οὐ γὰρ ἀργὸν δεῖ με καθῆσθαι. With the use of κάθημαι in Ac 23, cf. the curious interview between an Emperor (ἢ Commodus) and a certain Appianus, who has been condemned to death, where, in view of an impending riot, a soldier is represented as saying to the Emperor— κύριε, κάθῃ, “Pwpator γονγύζο[υσ]ι, ‘Lord, while you are sitting in judgement, the Romans are murmuring” (Edd.) (P Oxy I. 33 verso 41-18, late ii/A.D.). For the form κάθου (Mk 1258, Ac 234, from Ps 1104), see Maidhof, p. 300: cf. Menander 7yagm. p. 254, where Kock quotes other three passages from comic poets. With Pe/agia-Legenden, p. 44 καθημένη εἰς βαδιστήν, ‘‘seated on an ass,” Musonius p. 435 καθῆσθαι cis Σινώπην…
Read the full entry →κάθημαι (kathēmai) — to sit.
κάθημαι,
Ionic dialect κάτ-, 2nd pers. singular κάθησαι (Ionic dialect κάτ- [NT+5th c.BC+] codices; 3rd.pers. singular κάθηται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural κατέαται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κάθουσο [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular καθήσθω [Refs 4th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural καθήσθωσαν [Refs]; subjunctive καθῶμαι, κάθῃ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive καθῆσθα; participle καθήμενος: imperfect ἐκαθήμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also without syllable augment καθῆστο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect κατῆστο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect καθήατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect κατέατο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: the later future καθήσομαι [LXX+NT+5th c.BC+]:—to be seated, sit, αὐτός τε κάθησο καὶ ἄλλους ἵδρυε λαούς [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently in participle, πέτρῃ ἔπι προβλῆτι καθήμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ ἀκτῆς κλαῖε κ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κλαῖον δ᾽ ἐν…
Read the full entry →κάθημαι
kathemai
from 2596; and hemai (to sit; akin to the base of 1476); to sit down;
figuratively, to remain, reside:--dwell, sit (by, down).
see GREEK for 2596
see GREEK for 1476
κάθημαι
v.
I sit, am seated
κάθημαι to be seated, Hom., etc.
to be seated in court, Ar.; οἱ καθήμενοι the judges, the court, Thuc., etc.
to sit still, sit quiet, Lat. desidere, Hom., Hdt.: in bad sense, to sit or lie idle, Il., etc.
of a besieging army, to sit down or lie before a place, Eur., Thuc.
to lead a sedentary life, Hdt., Aesch., etc.
of people, to be settled, Hdt.
Verb-PNP-DSM — Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · dative · singular · masculinedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
V-PNP-DSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Participle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
sit'-ing (yashabh, "to sit down or still," daghar, "to brood," "hatch"; kathezomai, "to sit down," anakeimai, "to lie back," "recline"): The favorite position of the Orientals (Mal 3:3; Mt 9:9; 26:55 (compare Mt 5:1; Lu 4:20; 5:3); Mr 14:18; Lu 18:35; Joh 2:14, etc.).
"In Palestine people sit at all kinds of work; the carpenter saws, planes, and hews with his hand-adze, sitting upon the ground or upon the plank he is planing. The washerwoman sits by the tub, and, in a word, no one stands where it is possible to sit.…
Sitting
The attitude generally assumed in Palestine by those who were engaged in any kind of work. “The carpenter saws, planes, and hews with his hand-adze, sitting on the ground or upon the plank he is planning. The washerwoman sits by the tub; and, in a word, no one stands when it is possible to sit. Shopkeepers always sit, and Levi sitting at the receipt of custom (Matt. 9:9) is the exact way to state the case.”, Thomson, Land and Book.
91 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 91 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 75 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
17, 11), τοῦτο παριστὰς ὅτι, ὁ νοῦς ἐπειδὰν μὲν ἐξάρῃ αὑτὸν ἀπὸ τῶν θνητῶν καὶ μετεωρισθῇ, ῥώννυται τὸ ὁρῶν τὸν θεόν, ὅπερ ἐστὶν Ἰσραήλ, ἐπειδὰν δὲ καθῇ τοὺς ἰδίους τόνους καὶ ἐξασθενήσῃ, αὐτίκα τὸ πάθος ἰσχύσει, ὁ Ἀμαλήκ, ὃς ἑρμηνεύεται λαὸς…
νουμηνία μὲν εἰς τὴν ἐπιοῦσάν ἐστιν, ἔθος δʼ ἔχω δειπνεῖν σὺν τῷ βασιλεῖ καθήμενος·
ἐπεὶ οὖν μέλλουσιν λέγειν, ὅτι Χριστὸς υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν, αὐτὸς προφητεύει Δαυείδ, φοβούμενος καὶ συνίων τὴν πλάνην τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν: Εἷπεν κύριος τῷ κυρίῳ μου: Κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου.
ἐκθέματι κα … … … … ζεσθαι … τοὺς ἐναντ … … τόποις καθη … τοὺς δὲ ἐνθ … … τόποις ἢ ὅπου δήπου ῥ
ἐκδεδόσθαι μοι τὸν υἱὸν σοῦ Φοῦσκον, οὐδέπω ὄντα τῶν ἐτῶν ἐκδιδάξαι τὴν λινουφικὴν τῶν καθημένων τέχνην πᾶσαν ἐντελῶς, καθὰ καὶ ἐγὼ ἐπίσταμαι, ἐν ἔτεσι δυσί ἀπὸ μηνὸς Γερμανικείου τοῦ
καὶ αὐτὸς ἀντησπάσατο, καὶ τῆι … τοῦ αὐτοῦ μηνὸς ἠσπασάμεθα αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ ἀτρείωι, καθημένου αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τῷ βήματι. Τοῦσκος εἶπεν ἡμῖν· καὶ ἐν τῇ παρεμβολῆι εἶπον ὑμῖν καὶ
The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.
ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),
prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),
with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.
C. gen.,
of place, answering the question, where?
of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,
ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…
Read the full entry →ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…
Read the full entry →ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.
ἐπί,
Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.
__A WITH GEN.:
__A.I of Place,
__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…
ἐπί
epi
a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,
place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive
case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,
etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,
etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as
(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a
place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf
of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),
with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,
etc. (literally or figuratively).
ἐπί
Prep.
on, to, against, on the basis of, at
ἐπί epi 890x
(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →
ἐπί
on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.
prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.
WITH GEN.:
of Place,
with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.
not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
On
Light; the sun, (Gen. 41:45, 50), the great seat of sun-worship, called also Bethshemesh (Jer. 43:13) and Aven (Ezek. 30:17), stood on the east bank of the Nile, a few miles north of Memphis, and near Cairo, in the north-east. The Vulgate and the LXX. Versions have “Heliopolis” (“city of the sun”) instead of On in Genesis and of Aven in Ezekiel. The “city of destruction” Isaiah speaks of (19:18, marg. “of Heres;” Heb. ‘Ir-ha-heres, which some MSS. read Ir-ha-heres, i.e., “city of the sun”) may be the name given to On, the prophecy being that the time will come when that city which was known as the “city of the sun-god” shall become the “city of destruction” of the sun-god, i.e., when idolatry shall cease, and the worship…
(abode or city of the sun), a town of lower Egypt, called BETH-SHEMESH in (Jeremiah 43:13) On is better known under its Greek name Heliopolis. It was situated on the east side of the Pelusiac branch of the Nile, just below the point of the Delta, and about twenty miles northeast of Memphis. The chief object of worship at Heliopolis was the sun, whose temple, described by Strabo, is now only represented by the single beautiful obelisk, of red granite so feet 2 inches high above the pedestal which has stood for more than 4000 years, having been erected by Usirtesen, the second king of the twelfth dynasty. Heliopolis was anciently famous for its learning, and Eudoxus and Plato studied under its priests. The first mention of this place in the Bible is in the history of Joseph, to whom we read Pharaoh gave "to wife Asenath the daughter…
See HELIOPOLIS.
pain; force; iniquity
907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.
ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ
καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης
ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
νεφέλη is a feminine noun meaning 'cloud,' derived from νέφος. It is used in various contexts, including literal references to clouds in the sky and metaphorical uses, such as 'cloud of sorrow.' The New Testament cites it in several passages, notably in Matthew and Revelation, often in relation to divine presence or events.
νεφέλη, -ης, ἡ
(< νέφος),
[in LXX chiefly for עָנָן, also for עָב, etc.;]
νεφέλη, -ns, ἡ, (νέφος), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for 12}}» but also for ay and pnw; α cloud: [». φωτεινή, Mt. xvii. 5]; Mt.xxiv.30; xxvi.64; Mk.ix.7; xiii. 26; xiv. 62; LK. ix. 34sq.; xii. 54; xxi. 27; Actsi.9; 1 Th. iv. 17; 2 Pet. ii. 17 [Rec.]; Jude 12; Rev. i. 7; x. 1; xi 12; xiv. 14 sqq.; of that cloud in which Jehovah is said (Ex. xiii. 21 sq., ete.) to have gone before the Israelites on their march through the wilderness, and which Paul represents as spread over them (ὑπὸ τὴν νεφέλην ἦσαν, ef. Ps. civ. (6ν.) 39; Sap. x. 17): 1 Co. x. 1 sq. [Sy¥N. see véedos.]
νεφέλη (nephelē) — cloud.
νεφέλη, ἡ,
(νέφος) cloud, mass of clouds (distinguished from ὁμίχλη, mist or fog, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ν. κυανέη, πορφυρέη, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Mostly poetry, but found in [Refs 5th c.BC+] [same places], and in late Prose, [Refs 1st c.AD+]
2. metaphorically, νεφέλη δέ μιν ἀμφεκάλυψε κυανέη, of death, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν δ᾽ ἄχεος νεφέλη ἐκάλυψε μέλαινα a cloud of sorrow,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κενταύρου φονίᾳ νεφέλᾳ, i.e. with his blood, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κελαινῶπις ν., of sleep, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. of clouds in urine, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. ={νεφέλιον} 11.2, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.3. cloud on a mirror, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
III. fine bird-net, in plural, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
IV. Alchem., sublimate, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
νεφέλη
nephele
from 3509; properly, cloudiness, i.e. (concretely) a cloud:--cloud.
see GREEK for 3509
νεφέλη, ης, ἡ
n.f.
a cloud
νεφέλη nephelē 25x
a cloud, Mt. 17:5; 24:30; 26:64
νεφέλη νεφέλη, ἡ, νέφος a cloud, Hom., etc.
metaph., νεφέλη δέ μιν ἀμφεκάλυψεν κυανέη, of death, Il.; ἄχεος ν. a cloud of sorrow, Hom.; Κενταύρου φονίᾳ νεφέλᾳ, i. e. with his blood, Soph.
a bird-net, Ar.
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
kloud (`anan, `abh; nephele, nephos):
I. Clouds in Palestine.
In the Bible few references are found of particular clouds or of clouds in connection with the phenomena of the weather conditions. The weather in Palestine is more even and has less variety than that in other lands. It is a long, narrow country with sea on the West and desert on the East. The wind coming from the West is always moist and brings clouds with it. If the temperature over the land is low enough the clouds will be condensed and rain will fall, but if the temperature is high, as in the five months of summer, there can be no rain even though clouds are seen. As a whole the winter is cloudy and the summer clear.
Cloud
The Hebrew so rendered means “a covering,” because clouds cover the sky. The word is used as a symbol of the Divine presence, as indicating the splendour of that glory which it conceals (Ex. 16:10; 33:9; Num. 11:25; 12:5; Job 22:14; Ps. 18:11). A “cloud without rain” is a proverbial saying, denoting a man who does not keep his promise (Prov. 16:15; Isa. 18:4; 25:5; Jude 1:12). A cloud is the figure of that which is transitory (Job 30:15;
The shelter given, and refreshment of rain promised, by clouds give them their peculiar prominence in Oriental imagery. When a cloud appears rain is ordinarily apprehended, and thus the "cloud without rain" becomes a proverb for the man of promise without performance. (Proverbs 16:15; Isaiah 18:4; 25:5; Jude 1:12) comp. Prov 25:14 The cloud is a figure of transitoriness, (Job 30:15; Hosea 6:4) and of whatever intercepts divine favor or human supplication. (Lamentations 2:1; 3:44) A bright cloud at times visited and rested on the mercy-seat. (
PILLAR OF, the miraculous token of the divine presence and care, Ex 14:24 16:10 Nu 12:5, which guided the Israelites in the desert; it was a means of protection and perhaps of shade by day, and gave them light by night, Ex 13:21,22 14:19,20. By it God directed their movements, Nu 9:15-23 14:14 De 1:33. See the beautiful application of the image to the future church in Isa 4:5.
25 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 25 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 86 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τεθαύμακα δὲ ἔτι μᾶλλον, ἐπειδὰν κατακούων τῶν λογίων ἀναδιδάσκωμαι, ὃν τρόπον εἰσῆλθεν ἡ νεφέλη μέση τῆς τε Αἰγυπτιακῆς καὶ τῆς Ἰσραηλιτικῆς στρατιᾶς (Exod.
Ἐπὶ δύο μὲν οὖν ἡμέρας εὐωχούμενοι διῆγον, τῇ τρίτῃ δὲ πρὶν τὸν ἥλιον ἀνασχεῖν νεφέλη τε ὑπεράνω ἀνέσχε τοῦ παντὸς στρατοπέδου τῶν Ἑβραίων οὐ πρότερον τοῦτο ἰδόντων γενόμενον καὶ τὸ χωρίον οὗ τὰς σκηνὰς ἦσαν πεποιημένοι περιέγραφε,
τότε ὄψεται ὁ κόσμος τὸν κύριον ἐρχόμενον ἐπάνω τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ.
ἐξηγητῇ κολοκασία καὶ φῴδια μέρη λδ α ἀττανῖται γ … α πλακοῦντες λε α νεφέλαι λε νεφέλαι Θέωνι ἐξηγητῇ α λϛ γυμνασιάρχοις πλακοῦντες η ἀττανῖται η ι εἰς τὸ
ια ἀμφότεροι ομ … … μετὰ γνώμης καὶ συναινέσεως … … ἀστραπὲ καὶ νεφέλαι τὸν κύριον εὐλογεῖτε … … θυνη τὸν κύριον εὐλογεῖτε κύριον … … Λιφουρίου υἱοῦ
πέμπω, transliterated as pempō, means 'to send' and is used in various contexts, such as sending people, messages, or things. It appears in the New Testament to describe actions like sending messengers (e.g., Matthew 22:7) and is often associated with divine sending, as seen with figures like John the Baptist. The word has nuances of dispatching and conducting, and it can also imply sending with a purpose.
πέμπω,
[in LXX chiefly for שׁלח;]
to send;
πέμπω ; fut. πέμψω; 1 aor. ἔπεμψα [on its epistolary use (for the pres. or the pf.) see W. 278 (261); B. 198 (172): Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. ii. (25), 28; Philem. 11]; Pass., pres. πέμπομαι; 1 aor. ἐπέμφθην (Lk. vii. 10) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for nw; to send: twa, absol., one to do something, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. vii. 19; xvi. 24; Jn.i. 22; vii. 18; xiii. 16,20; xx. 21 [Treg. mrg. amooréAX.]; 2 Co. ix. 3; Phil. ii. 23, 28, ete.; τινά or τινάς is omitted where the ptep. is joined to another finite verb, as πέμψας ἀπεκεφάλισε τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην, he sent (a deputy) and beheaded John, Mt. xiv. 10; add, Acts xix. 31; xxiii. 30, (for other exx. see ἀποστέλλω, 1 d.); in imitation of the Hebr. 79 V3 Now (1S. xvi. 20; 2S. xi. 14; xii. 25; 1K. ii. 25) we find πέμψας διὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, he sent by his disciples (unless with Fritzsche, and Bornemann, Schol. in Lue. p. lxv., one prefer to take πέμψας absol.…
Read the full entry →πέμπω. It is not necessary to do more than cite a few exx. of this common verb—P Hib I. 5415 (c. B.c. 245) (= Chrest. I. Ῥ. 563) κόμισαι δὲ Kal τὸν ἔριφον παρὰ ᾿Αριστίωνος καὶ πέμψον ἡμῖν, ‘get the kid also from Aristion and send it to me,’ P Par 63: 17(B.c. 164) (=P Petr III. p. 18) a 2 πενθέω ἐν τῶι πεμφθέντι σοι Tap ἡμῶν ὑπομνήματι, “in the minute sent to you by us,” P Tebt I. 225 (B.c. 112) πεπομφότες τῆι κα ἐπὶ τὰ σπέρματα, “having sent on the 2151 for the seed,” 26. II. 414° (ii/A.D.) t μὴ ὅτι ἠσθένηκα, πάλαι πεπόνφην cot, “had it not been for the fact that I was ill, I would have sent them to you long ago’’ (Edd.), and P Iand 108f. (iii/A.D.) ἐπένσαμέν σοι ταύτην τὴν ἐπ]ιστολὴν διὰ τῶν φυλάκων [ἐκπορευομένων, ἐπειδὴ δι᾿ ἄλλ]ου οὐ δυνάμεθα πένσαι σοι, with the editor’s note, where there are also collected a number of instances of the dropping of the 24 π, e.g. P Oxy III. 5281…
Read the full entry →πέμπω (pempō) — to send.
πέμπω,
Epic dialect infinitive -έμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect imperfect πέμπεσκε [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future πέμψω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect πεμψῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Epic dialect infinitive πεμψέμεναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist ἔπεμψα, Epic dialect πέμψα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect πέπομφα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἐπεμπόμφει, Ionic dialect -εε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle (not in early Prose, except in compounds ἀπο-, μετα-, προ-πέμπομαι), future πέμψομαι only falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐπεμψάμην [Refs]:—passive, future πεμφθήσομαι [Refs 1st c.BC+]: aorist ἐπέμφθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: 3rd.pers. singular perfect πέπεμπται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle πεπεμμένος [Refs 4th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἐπέπεμπτο [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—send, frequently of persons, as messengers, spies, etc., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of troops, [Refs 4th c.BC+] send…
Read the full entry →πέμπω
pempo
apparently a primary verb; to dispatch (from the subjective view or
point of departure, whereas hiemi (as a stronger form of eimi) refers
rather to the objective point or terminus ad quem, and 4724 denotes
properly, the orderly motion involved), especially on a temporary
errand; also to transmit, bestow, or wield:--send, thrust in.
see GREEK for 4724
πέμπω
v.
I send
πέμπω pempō 79x
to send, to despatch on any message, embassy, business, etc., Mt. 2:8; 11:2; 14:10; to transmit, Acts 11:29; Rev. 1:11; to dismiss, permit to go, Mk. 5:12; to send in or among, 2 Thess. 2:11; to thrust in, or put forth, Rev. 14:15, 18
πέμπω to send, despatch, Il., etc.; of a ship, to convey, carry, Od.; c. dupl. acc., ὁδὸν π. τινά to conduct one on his way Soph.
to send forth or away, dismiss, like ἀποπέμπω, to send home, Hom.; χρὴ ξεῖνον παρεόντα φιλεῖν, ἐθέλοντα δὲ πέμπειν, "welcome the coming, speed the parting guest, " Od.
of missiles, to discharge, shoot forth, Hes.
of words, to send forth, utter, Aesch., Soph.
to conduct, convoy, escort, Lat. deduco, Hom., etc.; ὁ πέμπων absol., of Hermes, Soph.:— πομπὴν πέμπειν to conduct a procession, Hdt., Thuc.; π. χορούς Eur., Xen.: in Pass., πέμπεσθαι Διονύσωι to be carried in procession in his honour, Hdt.
to send with one, give as provision for a journey, Od., Hdt., etc.
like ἀναπέμπω, to send up, produce, Soph.
Verb-AAM-2S — Verb · aorist · active · imperative · second person · singularaorist active imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular
forth: "Forth," adverb (from "for"), signifies movement
(1) forward,
(2) out of,
(3) beyond a certain boundary.
In a few instances in the Old Testament it is the translation of the preposition `al, properly "above," "upon" (2Ki 11:15; 2Ch 23:14; Am 7:17 the King James Version), and of chuts, "without" (Ge 39:13; Jud 19:25). "Forth" is often used as an expletive of various verbs, as "break (forth)," "bring (forth)," "call (forth)," etc. In the Gospel of John it is the translation of exo, "without," as "Lazarus, come forth" (11:43; so 15:6; 19:4 the King James Version…
79 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 79 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
οὐκ ἂν οὖν ἀφθόνου θεραπείας ὑπαρχούσης υἱὸν ἠξίου πέμπειν, οὗ μάλιστα ἐκήδετο, ἐπὶ πρᾶξιν, ἣν καὶ τῶν εὐτελεστάτων ἄν τις ῥᾳδίως κατώρθωσεν.
οὐδὲ γὰρ πᾶσαν ἐκεῖνος ἔφθη λαβεῖν τὴν ἀναγραφήν, ἀλλὰ μόνα τὰ τοῦ νόμου παρέδοσαν οἱ πεμφθέντες ἐπὶ τὴν ἐξήγησιν εἰς τὴν Ἀλεξάνδρειαν·
λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.
τόν ποτε ἡγούμενον τόκους ἐτῶν β δραχμὰς ρκ. καὶ τὰς θύρας ἐπιστησάτωσαν οἱ τέκτονες· πέμπω δέ σοι τὰ σχοινία. τὰς δὲ ὠλένας τοῦ ἐλαιουργίου διπλᾶς ποίησον, τὰς δὲ τῶν
ἐκείνου τοῦ μετεώρου ἕως πεντεκαιδεκάτης τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνὸς Χύακ, καὶ ἐὰν δύνῃ ἀρτάβην ἐλᾶς πέμψαι α… πέμψεις ἵνα τῶι ἀδελφῶι πέμψωμεν. μὴ οὖν ἄλλως ποιήσῃς. ἐὰν ἀποχωρῶ πέμψω πρὸς
τὸν βασιλικὸν διαδέχεσθαι τὴν στρατηγείαν Ἐράσου ἐξ ἐπιστολῆς τοῦ κρατίστου ἡγεμόνος. ἐάν συ δόξῃ πέμψαι αὐτῷ ἐλᾶς ἀρτάβην α καὶ ἰχθύδιον ἐπεὶ χρείαν αὐτοῦ ἔχομεν. πέμψεις ἡμῖν εἰς οἶκον
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuteraccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word δρέπανον (drepanon) means 'sickle' and is derived from δρέπω (to pluck). It refers to a curved instrument used for harvesting, such as a sickle or pruning-hook, and appears in the New Testament in Mark 4:29 and Revelation 14:14-19. The lexicons note its use in various contexts, including agriculture and even in some inscriptions related to curses.
δρέπανον, -ου, τό
(later form of Attic δρεπάνη, < δρέπω, to pluck),
[in LXX for מַזְמֵרָה, חֶרְמֵשׁ, etc. ;]
a sickle, pruning-hook; Mk 4:29, Re 14:14-19.†
δρέπανον, -ov, τό, (i. q. δρεπάνη, fr. δρέπω to pluck, pluck off), a sickle, a pruning-hook, ahooked vine-knife, such as reapers and vine-dressers use: Mk. iv. 29; Rey. xiv. 14-19. (Hom. and subseq. writ.; Sept.)
δρέπανον. P Magd δ᾽ (B.c. 218) δρέπανον θεριστικὸν οὗ τιμὴ (δραχμαὶ) B, ‘a sickle for reaping worth 2 drachmae,” P Petr Il. 334-18 καὶ φελίου kal Speravov. In two (apparently Jewish or Jewish Christian) inscrr. from Phrygia we find δρέπανον used in connexion with an imprecation— C. and B. ii. p. 565, no. 466, ἐὰν δέ τις αὐτῶν μὴ φοβηθῇ τούτων τῶν καταρῶν, τὸ ἀρᾶς δρέπανον εἰσέλθοιτο εἰς τὰς οἰκήσις αὐτῶν καὶ μηδίναν ἐνκαταλείψετο: cf. 20. p. 652, no. 563. MGr δρεπάνι.
δρέπανον (drepanon) — sickle.
δρέπᾰνον, τό,
also δράπανον (which see), (δρέπω) ={δρεπάνη}, δ. εὐκαμπές [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the usual form in Prose and Comedy texts, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. pruning-knife, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. scythe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
4. curved sword, scimitar, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
δρέπανον
drepanon
from drepo (to pluck); a gathering hook (especially for
harvesting):--sickle.
δρέπανον, ου, τό
n.n.
a sickle
δρέπανον drepanon 8x
an instrument with a curved blade, as a sickle, Mk. 4:29; Rev. 14:14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19*
δρέπανον δρέπα^νον, ου, τό, ndrepa^n os_ou neut δρέπω = δρεπάνη, Od., Hdt., Att. a scythe, Xen.
a curved sword, scimitar, Hdt.
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuteraccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
sik'-'l (chermesh (De 16:9; 23:25), maggal; compare Arabic minjal (Jer 50:16; Joe 3:13); drepanon (Mr 4:29; Re 14:14-19)): Although the ancients pulled much of their grain by hand, we know that they also used sickles. The form of this instrument varied, as is evidenced by the Egyptian sculptures. The earliest sickle was probably of wood, shaped like the modern scythe, although much smaller, with the cutting edge made of sharp flints set into the wood. Sickle flints were found at Tel el-Chesy. Crescent-shaped iron sickles were found in the same mound. In Palestine and Syria the sickle varies in size. It is usually made…
Sickle
Of the Egyptians resembled that in modern use. The ears of corn were cut with it near the top of the straw. There was also a sickle used for warlike purposes, more correctly, however, called a pruning-hook (Deut. 16:9; Jer. 50:16, marg., “scythe;” Joel 3:13; Mark 4:29).
→ An agricultural implement used for cutting grain De 23:25; Jer 50:16; Mr 4:29
→ FIGURATIVE
Of the judgments of God Joe 3:13; Re 14:14-19
8 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
φέρουσι δʼ οἱ μὲν περὶ τὸν στρατηγὸν ἐπίλεκτοι πεζοὶ λόγχην καὶ ἀσπίδα, ἡ δὲ λοιπὴ φάλαγξ ξυστόν τε καὶ θυρεὸν ἐπιμήκη, πρὸς οἷς πρίονα καὶ κόφινον ἄμην τε καὶ πέλεκυν, πρὸς δὲ ἱμάντα καὶ δρέπανον καὶ ἅλυσιν, ἡμερῶν τε τριῶν ἐφόδιον·
εἱστήκει δὲ ἄγγελος κυρίου ἔνδοξος λίαν ὑψηλὸς παρὰ τὴν ἰτέαν, δρέπανον ἔχων μέγα, καὶ ἔκοπτε κλάδους ἀπὸ τῆς ἰτέας, καὶ ἐπεδίδου τῷ λαῷ τῷ σκεπαζομένῳ ὑπὸ τῆς ἰτέας: μικρὰ δὲ ῥαβδία ἐπεδίδου αὐτοῖς, ὡσεὶ πηχυαῖα.
τοῦ δὲ προγεγραμμένου ἔτους … τὸν βίον καταλυσάσης, ὑπαρχόντων δέ μοι σκευῶν … αι δρέπανον θεριστικὸν οὗ τιμὴ δραχμαὶ β, ἀξίνη οὗ τιμὴ δραχμαὶ β ὀβολοὶ γ … ουν
ἐπʼ αὐτοὺς κακοποιήσαντες αὐτὸν ἔτυπτον εἰς ὃ ἔτυχον μέρος τοῦ σώματος καὶ ἀφείλοντο ἀμπελουργικὸν δρέπανον. τυγχάνουσι δὲ οἱ προγεγραμμένοι λῃσταὶ ἐν Κερκεοσίρει κατοικοῦντες εἰκάζω δὲ τὰ τετρυγημένα εἰς οἴνου
θίδης δραχμὰς ϡ … … ετη Ἀπολλωνι … ς δραχμὰς τ … ἀμπελουργικὸν δρέπανον … Φαμενὼτ ιβ παρε… πληρώσει Φίλων Φαρμοῦθι ι δραχμὰς ρ … φλοῦν δραχμὰς ρκ
σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.
σύ,
pron. of 2nd pers.,
thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also
Read the full entry →σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…
Read the full entry →σύ (su) — you.
σύ [ῠ],
thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…
Read the full entry →σύ
su
the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See
also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.
see GREEK for 4675
see GREEK for 4571
see GREEK for 4671
see GREEK for 5209
see GREEK for 5210
see GREEK for 5213
see GREEK for 5216
σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ
Pers.pr.
you
σύ sy 2x
you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6
Pron-2GS — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singulargenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
P-2GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Singular
3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.
παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν
η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ
παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
θερίζω (therizō) means to reap or harvest, primarily used in agricultural contexts. It appears in various New Testament passages, including Matthew and Galatians, often metaphorically to signify reaping rewards or consequences of actions. The word is derived from the root related to summer work and can also imply cutting off or destroying in a figurative sense.
θερίζω ; fut. θερίσω [B. 37 (32), cf. WH. App. p. 163 sq-]; 1 aor. eetieaas ; 1 aor. pass. ἐθερίσθην; (θέρος) ; Sept. for yp; [fr. Aeschyl., Hadt. down]; to reap, harvest; a. ah Mt. vi. 26; Lk. xii. 24; Jas.v. 4; [fig. Jn. iv. 36 (bis)]. Ὅ. in aa erbial expressions about sowing and reapiny: ἄλλος . . - ὁ θερίζων, one does the work, another gets the reward, Jn. iv. 37 sq. (where the meaning is ‘ye hereafter, in winning over a far greater number of the Samaritans to the kingdom of God, will enjoy the fruits of the work which I have now commenced among them’ [al. do not restrict the reference to converted Samaritans]); θερίζων ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειpas, unjustly appropriating 1o thyself the fruits of others’ labor, Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Lk. xix. 21 sq.; ὃ ἐὰν -- θερίσει, as aman has acted (on earth) so (hereafter by God) will he be requited, either with reward or penalty, (his deeds will determine his…
Read the full entry →θερίζω. An interesting example of this verb is found in P Magd 1212 (p.c. 217), where a farmer, finding himself expelled by the proprietors from his holding on the approach of harvest, on the ground that his contract had not been properly sealed, petitions that they should not be allowed to reap the crops until the case had been decided—tws δὲ τοῦ διέξοδον λαβεῖν τὴν κρίσιν μὴ θερίζειν αὐτούς. See also P Fay 1129 (A.D. 99) where the considerable, but illiterate, landowner Gemellus writes to his nephew—tav ὥγμ[ον] (1. τὸν ὄγμ[ον]) τῆς ᾿Απιάδος ἕως σήμερον ov ἐθέρ[ι]σας ἀλλ᾽ ἠμέληκας αὐτοῦ καὶ μέχρι τούτου τὼ ἥμυσυ αὐτοῦ ἐθέρισας, “up to to-day you have not harvested the field at Apias, but have neglected it, and so far have only harvested the half” (Edd.): cf. 76. 1207 (c. A.D. 100). Other exx. are P Flor I. 807 (i/ii A.D.) ὁμολογοῦμ[ε]ν παρέξειν ἡμᾶς θερίζοντες (/.—tas) ols ἔχεις…
Read the full entry →θερίζω (therizō) — to reap.
θερίζω,
Boeotian dialect infinitive θερίδδειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future Attic dialect -ιῶ[Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐθέρισα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; poetry ἐθέρισσα [Refs]; later (subjunctive) ἐκθερίξω [Refs] —middle (see. below):—passive, aorist ἐθερίσθην: perfect τεθέρισμαι (see. below): (θέρος):—do summer-work, mow, reap, σῖτον, κριθάς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, harvest, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— middle, καρπὸν Δηοῦς θερίσασθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, ἃ [δράγματα] ἔτυχεν.. τεθερισμένα [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. metaphorically, mow down, Ἄρη τὸν.. θερίζοντα βροτούς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θ. Ἀσίαν to plunder it, [Refs 1st c.AD+]
θερίζω
therizo
from 2330 (in the sense of the crop); to harvest:--reap.
see GREEK for 2330
θερίζω
v.
I reap, gather
θερίζω therizō 21x
to gather in harvest, reap, Mt. 6:26; 25:24, 26; met. to reap the reward of labor, 1 Cor. 9:11; 2 Cor. 9:6; to reap the harvest of vengeance, Rev. 14:15, 16
θερίζω θέρος to do summer-work, to mow, reap, σῖτον, κριθάς, καρπόν Hdt., Ar., etc.:—Mid., καρπὸν Δηοῦς θερίσασθαι id. Ar.
metaph. to cut off, Soph., Eur.
metaph. to reap a good harvest, Ar.
ὁ θερίζων (with or without λόγος) a kind of syllogism, Luc.
intr. to pass the summer, Xen.; cf. ἐαρίζω, χειμάζω.
Verb-AAM-2S — Verb · aorist · active · imperative · second person · singularaorist active imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular
21 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 21 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὁ δ’ ἔσπειρε μὲν ἐπιδεικνύμενος τὴν ἐχθρὰν φθόνου καὶ κακίας ἀρετήν, εὑρεῖν δέ, ἀλλ’ οὐ θερίσαι λέγεται·
καὶ τότε λοιπὸν δημοσίᾳ ἔξεστι πᾶσι καὶ ἰδίᾳ θερίζειν.
δὲ τῶν θεριστῶν γίγνωσκε ὅτι ἐὰν πρὸς μισθὸν αὐτοὺς θερίσωσιν αλ … πρὸς ἀρουρισμὸν θερίζουσιν ἑκάστης ἀρούρας ἀνὰ δραχμὰς β τριώβολον· εὐτύχει
καὶ λικμητρίδας δύο καὶ πτύον ἕν , ἐπεὶ κολάζομαι αὐτῶν εἰς Ἀφροδίτην πόλιν, καὶ θέρισον τὸν ὄγμον τῆς Ἀπιάδος καὶ λύσεις εὐθέως εἰς Ἀ … … τὰ δράγματα, καὶ
ἀπὸ δεκάτης ἡμέρας τοῦ Παχὼν καὶ οὐκ ἀποστησόμεθα … καὶ τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ὁμοίως θερίσομεν … περὶ Νεκοσὺ ἀρούρας τρεῖς ο … … τη … εν … ης συμφωνίας.
The Greek word ὅτι (hoti) is a conjunction primarily meaning 'that' or 'because.' It introduces objective clauses, often following verbs of perception or declaration, and can also serve as a causal particle. The New Testament frequently employs it in this way, such as in Matthew 5:4-12. There is some variation in how lexicons describe its usage, particularly regarding its pleonastic function in direct discourse.
ὅτι [properly neut. of ὅστις], a conjunction [fr. Hom. down], (Lat. quod [ef. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149, 87), marking I. the substance or contents (of a statement), that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : ἀναγγέλλειν, Acts xiv. 27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts ix. 273; εἰπεῖν, Mt. xvi. 20; xxviii. 7,13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; λέγειν, Mt. iii. 9; vill. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv.7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 9 [T Tr WH om. L br. ὅτι}; ix. 2, and very often; προεἰρηκέναι, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the ὅτι in Acts xiv. 22 supply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες [ef. B. §151, 11]; ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Co. ix.10; 1 Jn. 11. 12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; iii. 28; iv. 44; ὁμολογεῖν, Heb. xi. 13; δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δηλοῦν, 1 Co. i. 11; διδάσκειν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ἐμφανίζειν. Heb. xi. 14; δῆλον (ἐστίν), 1 Co.…
Read the full entry →οτι. (1) For ὅτι, ‘‘that,” introducing an objective clause after verbs of knowing, saying, etc., cf. P Tebt II. 4098 (A.D. 5) εἰδὼ[ς ὅ]τι ἐξίι)ουσίαν αὐτῶν ἔχει kal Λυσίμαχος kal σύ, ΚΕ knew that both you and Lysimachus had plenty of them” (Edd.), P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) νομίσας ὅτι (cf. Mt 517) κιχρᾷς por αὐτούς, ““ consider that you are lending them (sc. staters) to me’’ (Edd.), BGU III. 8464* (ii/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 93) γεινώσκειν σαι θέλω, ὅτι οὐχ [HA] Lov, ὅτι ἀναβένις (1. ἀναβαίνεις) els τὴν μητρόπολιν, “1 wish you to know that I had no hope that you were coming up to the metropolis,” 74.9 αἴγραψά σοι, ὅτι γυμνός εἰμει, “1 wrote you that I am naked,” and P Tebt II. 420+ (iii/A.D.) οἴδατε ὅτι ἀπὸ ζημίας ἠμί, ‘‘ You know that I am blameless.” Ὅτι, however, is frequently omitted, e.g. BGU IIL. 8153(ii/a.p.) γεινόσκιν σε θέλω [τὴ]ν ἐπιστολήν σου ἔλαβε (corrected by another hand…
Read the full entry →ὅτι (hoti) — that/since: that.
ὅτῐ,
Epic dialect ὅττῐ (both in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: conjunction, to introduce an objective clause, that, after Verbs of seeing or knowing, thinking or saying; in [Refs 8th c.BC+] —Usage:
I. when ὅτι introduces a statement of fact:
I. a in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always with indicative, the tense following the same rules as in English, ἤγγειλ᾽ ὅττι ῥά οἱ πόσις ἔκτοθι μίμνε πυλάων [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I. b in Attic dialect, ὅτι takes indicative after primary tenses, indicative or optative after secondary tenses, e.g. ἐνδείκνυμαι ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι σοφός [Refs 5th c.BC+] news came that Megara had (literal has) revolted, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes optative and indicative are found in the same sentence, ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, Ἀριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς.. εἴη [Refs 5th c.BC+].. and the accusative with infinitive…
ὅτι
hoti
neuter of 3748 as conjunction; demonstrative, that (sometimes
redundant); causative, because:--as concerning that, as though,
because (that), for (that), how (that), (in) that, though, why.
see GREEK for 3748
ὅτι
Cj.
that, since, because
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
be-kos' (hina, "in order that"): "The multitude rebuked them, because (AV; the Revised Version (British and American) "that") they should hold their peace" (Mt 20:31).
1,329 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,293 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Μωυσῆς δὲ καὶ φιλοσοφίας ἐπ’ αὐτὴν φθάσας ἀκρότητα καὶ χρησμοῖς τὰ πολλὰ καὶ συνεκτικώτατα τῶν τῆς φύσεως ἀναδιδαχθεὶς ἔγνω δή, ὅτι ἀναγκαιότατόν ἐστιν ἐν τοῖς οὖσι τὸ μὲν εἶναι δραστήριον αἴτιον, τὸ δὲ παθητόν, καὶ ὅτι τὸ μὲν δραστήριον ὁ τῶν ὅλων…
ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.
ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.
καὶ τὴν εἰκοστὴν τοῦ ἐγκυκλίου καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ καθήκοντα. … ται Προῖτος, καθʼ ὅτι πρόκειται … ἑξήκοντα ἓξ τετρωβόλου καὶ τῆς … … τοπογραμματέως τοῦ Παθυρίτου … ἀρουρῶν
ι τοῖς ἐνκαλουμένοις τὸ ἀντίγραφον τῆς ἐντεύξεως λαβεῖν παρ … τ … … πίστιν ὅτι ἀπαντησα … ἐπὶ τὸ ἐν τῆι αὐλῆι κριτήριον ἐν ἡμέραις λ οὐκ ο
δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι τοῦ καὶ ἡμᾶς ὅτι τάχος ἐπιβαλεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἔρρωσοἔρρωσο ἔτους κϛ Φαμενὼθ ιϛ
The Greek word ἔρχομαι (i.e., *erchomai*) means 'to come' or 'to go.' It is used in various contexts, often indicating arrival or return, and can apply to both people and events. The New Testament frequently employs this term, notably in references to the coming of the Messiah (e.g., Mt 11:3). Lexicons note its use with various prepositions to indicate direction or purpose.
ἔρχομαι,
[in LXX very freq. for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;]
to come;
ἔρχομαι, impy. ἔρχου. ἔρχεσθε, (for the Attic ἴθι, tre fr. εἶμι); impf. ἠρχόμην (for ἤειν and ya more com. in Attic) ; fut. ἐλεύσομαι; ---- (on these forms cf. [esp. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 103 sqq.; Veitch 5. v.]; Matthiae § 234; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 182 sq.; Kriiger § 40 5. v.; Kiihner §343; W.§ 15s. v.; [B. 58 (50)]); pf. ἐλήλυθα; plpf. ἐληλύθειν; 2 aor. ἦλθον and (occasionally by LT Tr WH [together or severally ]—as Mt. vi. 10; [vii. 25, 27; x.13; xiv. 34; xxv. 86; Mk. i. 29; vi. 29; Lk. i. 59; ii. 16; v. 7; Vi. 17; viii. 35; x1. 2; xxiii. 33; xxiv. 1,23]; Jn. [1.39 (40); iii. 26]; iv. 27; [xii. 97; Acts xii. 10; [xiv. 24]; xxviii. 14 sq. etc.) in the Alexandrian form ἦλθα (see ἀπέρχομαι init. for reff.); Sept. for x13, rarely for ANN and 72; [fr. Hom. down] ; I. to come; 1. prop. a. of persons; a. univ. to come from one place into another, and used both of persons arriving,—as in…
Read the full entry →ἔρχομαι. P Fay 123!5 (c A.D. 100) ἐλήλυθεν γὰρ Τεύφιλος ᾿Ιουδαῖος λέγων [ὅ]τι ἤχθην is γεωργίαν, ‘ Teuphilus the Jew has come saying, ‘I have been pressed in as a cultivator’” (Edd.) will serve as an instance of the ordinary use of this very common verb: the mention of the Jew Teuphilus (or Theophilus) is interesting. A few miscellaneous exx. may be added which illustrate NT constructions or phrases— with Jn 5*% cf. P Lond 427 (B.c. 168) (= I. p. 30, Se/ections, Ῥ. 10) εἰς πᾶν τι ἐληλυθυῖα διὰ τὴν τοῦ σίτου τιμήν, ‘ having come to the last extremity because of the high price of corn,” P Vat A® (B.c. 168) (= Witkowski’, p. 65) τοῦ παιδίου σου els τὰ ἔσχατα ἐληλυθότος, P Flor IL. 212° (A.D. 254) els τοσαύτην ἀτυχίαν ἦλθες. . . ὡς μὴ ἔχειν σε ἀρτά[β]ην μίαν λωτίνου: with Jn 939 cf. P Tor I. 1 ἴ1 39 (B.c. 116) ἔρχεσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ κριτήριον : with Jn 18, cf. the late P Iand I. 21% (vi/vii A.D.)…
Read the full entry →ἔρχομαι (erchomai) — to come/go.
ἔρχομαι
[Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect ἠρχόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in later Prose, [LXX+NT+2nd c.AD+]; in Attic dialect rare even in compounds, ἐπ-ηρχόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]future ἐλεύσομαι, [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect, Trag. [Refs 5th c.BC+], in Attic dialect Prose only in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist, Epic dialect and Lyric poetry ἤλῠθον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but ἦλθον is more frequently even in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect infinitive ἐλθέμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs 8th c.BC+] unaugmented unless ἐξ-ελύθη [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἦνθον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle ἐνθών [Refs 6th c.BC+]; subjunctive ἔνθῃ [Refs]; Laconian dialect ἔλσῃ, ἔλσοιμι, ἐλσών, [NT+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἤλθοσαν [LXX+2nd c.BC+]; ἤλυθα [Refs 4th c.AD+]perfect ἐλήλῠθα (not in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; syncopated. plural ἐλήλῠμεν, -υτε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect…
Read the full entry →ἔρχομαι
erchomai
middle voice of a primary verb
(used only in the present and imperfect tenses, the others being
supplied by a kindred (middle voice)
eleuthomai el-yoo'-thom-ahee, or (active)
eltho el'-tho,
which do not otherwise occur)
to come or go (in a great variety of applications, literally and
figuratively):--accompany, appear, bring, come, enter, fall out, go,
grow, X light, X next, pass, resort, be set.
ἔρχομαι
v.
I come, go
ἔρχομαι erchomai 632x
to come, to go, to pass. By the combination of this verb with other terms, a variety of meaning results, which, however, is due, not to a change of meaning in the verb, but to the adjuncts. Ὁ ἐρχόμενος, He who is coming, the expected Messiah, Mt. 11:3
ἔρχομαι to come or go, Hom., etc.
to come or go back, return, Od.; in full, αὖτις, ἄψ, πάλιν ἐλθεῖν id. Od.
c. acc. cogn., ὁδόν or κέλευθον ἐλθεῖν to go a journey, Hom., Aesch.; ἀγγελίην ἐλθεῖν to go a message, Il.
c. gen. loci, πεδίοιο ἐλθεῖν over or across the plain, id. Il.
c. part. fut., to denote the object, ἔρχομαι οἰσόμενος I go to fetch, id. Il.; μαρτυρήσων ἦλθον Aesch., etc.:—like an auxiliary Verb, ἔρχομαι λέξων I am going to tell, I intend to say (as in French je vais dire), Hdt.
the aor. part. ἐλθών is often added to another Verb, κάθηρον ἐλθών come and cleanse, Il., etc.
Post-Homeric phrases:
εἰς λόγους ἔρχεσθαί τινι to come to speech with, Hdt., Soph.
Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singularsecond aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
kum: The translation of many Hebrew and Greek words. In the phrase "The Spirit of Yahweh came mightily upon him" (Jud 14:6,19; 15:14; 1Sa 10:10; 11:6; 16:13), the word is tsaleah; Jud 14:6; 15:14 "came mightily," which is the uniform translation of the Revised Version (British and American) (compare Jud 13:25 "to move," i.e. to disturb or stir up). In Jud 6:34; 1Ch 12:18; 2Ch 24:20, it is labhesh, "to clothe"; the Revised Version, margin "The Spirit .... clothed itself with Gideon" and .... "with Zechariah,"…
642 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 91 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 635 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 423 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ γὰρ εὔλογον τῷ ὄντι πρῶτον αὐτὸν εἰς γένεσιν ἐλθεῖν, ἄριστόν τε ὄντα τῶν γεγονότων κἀκ τοῦ καθαρωτάτου τῆς οὐσίας παγέντα, διότι θεῶν ἐμφανῶν τε καὶ αἰσθητῶν ἔμελλεν οἶκος ἔσεσθαι ἱερώτατος.
ταύτης δʼ ὑπʼ ὄψιν οὐκ ἐρχομένης, ἀλλὰ βαθεῖ μὲν κρυπτομένης σκότει, πνεύματος δʼ αὐτὴν ἄνωθεν ἐπιθέοντος, γενέσθαι φῶς ἐκέλευσεν ὁ θεός.
ὅτε δὲ τοὺς ἰδίους ἀποστόλους τοὺς μέλλοντας κηρύσσειν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον αὐτοῦ ἐξελέξατο, ὄντας ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν ἁμαρτίαν ἀνομωτέρους, ἵνα δείξῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἦλθεν καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς, τότε ἐφανέρωσεν ἑαυτὸν εἶναι υἱὸν θεοῦ.
καὶ ἵνʼ ἀεὶ διδῶσιν οἱ ἐκεῖθεν ποιά τινα· τὴν δὲ τιμὴν αὐτοῦ ὡς ἂν ἔλθῃς δώσουσι. καί, εἰ δυνατόν, Ἕρμωνα πρόδομα λαβεῖν ἄχρι τῶν Λαμέδοντος.
καὶ ἐν τῶι β ἔτει … τῆι ζ εἰς τὴν η ἦλθεν μετά μεθυόντων … τινων καὶ ἔκρουσεν τὴν θύραν κελεύων ἄνοιξον ἵνα πίωμεν. ἐμοῦ δὲ
παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις
σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.
σύ,
pron. of 2nd pers.,
thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also
Read the full entry →σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…
Read the full entry →σύ (su) — you.
σύ [ῠ],
thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…
Read the full entry →σύ
su
the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See
also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.
see GREEK for 4675
see GREEK for 4571
see GREEK for 4671
see GREEK for 5209
see GREEK for 5210
see GREEK for 5213
see GREEK for 5216
σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ
Pers.pr.
you
σύ sy 2x
you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6
3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.
παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν
η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ
παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ὥρα, transliterated as hora, primarily means 'hour' but also refers to any fixed period of time or season. It encompasses specific times of day or seasons of the year, as seen in various New Testament passages like Matthew 24:36 and John 2:4. The lexicons indicate its use for both literal and figurative time, without significant disagreement among them.
ὥρα, -ας, ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly for עֵת and in Da for שָׁעָה ;]
any time or period fixed by nature, esp. a season (Hom., Hdt., Plat., al.).
A part of the day, and esp. a twelfth part of day or night, an hour: Mt 24:36, Mk 13:32, Ac 10:3, al.; accus. in ans. to "when"? (M, Pr., 63, 215; Bl., § 34, 8), Jo 4:52, Ac 10:3, 30 I Co 15:30, Re 3:3; acc. of duration, Mt 20:12 26:40, Mk 14:37; inexactly, πρὸς ὥραν, for a season, for a time, Jo 5:35,
ὥρα, -as, ἡ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for nyy and in Dan. for NYW; 1. a certain definite time or season fixed by natural law and returning with the revolving year; of the seasons of the year, spring, summer, autumn, winter, as ὥρα τοῦ θέρους, mpwipos K. ὄψιμος, χειμερία, ete.; often in the Grk. writ. [ef. L. ἀπά S.s.v. A. I. 1 α., and on the inherent force of the word esp. Schmidt ch. 44 §6 sq. ]. 2. the daytime (bounded by the rising and the setting of the sun), a day: Spa παρῆλθεν, Mt. x:V. 15; ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης (or γινομένης), [ A. V. σ΄ ὥρα when the day was now far spent}, Mk. vi. 35 (see πολύς, c. [but note that in the ex. fr. Polyb. there cited πολλῆς ὥρας means early]); ὀψίας [ὀψὲ T Tr τσ. WH txt.] ἤδη οὔσης τῆς Spas [WH mrg. br. τῆς ὥρας], Mk. xi. 11 (ὀψὲ τῆς ὥρας, Polyb. 3, 83, 7; ris ὥρας ἐγίγνετο ὀψέ, Dem. p. 541, 28). 3. α twelfth part of the day-time, ἡ an hour, (the…
Read the full entry →ὥρα (1) ‘an hour”: P Oxy II. 2357 (4.15. 20-50) ὥρᾳ τετάρτῃ τῆς νυκτός, Ρ Ryl II. 234° (ii/A.p.) apa a, ““αἱ the first hour,’’ P Hamb I. 96% (date of a horoscope—a.p. 145) ὀγδόου ᾿Αντωνείνου Φαρμοῦτι κατ᾽ ἀρχαίους 18 ὥρᾳ τρίτῃ νυκτός, P Ryl II. 1091! (A.D. 235) τῇ KH τοῦ ὄντος Μεσορὴ μηνὸς ὥρας ἀρχομένης τετάρτης, and P Oxy IX. 12147 (v/A.D.) &p(as) £, “at 7 o'clock.” With ἡ ὥρα = “the fatal hour,” as in Mt 264, cf. P Leid Wvi-27 (ji/iii a.p.) (=II. p. 103) βοήθησον ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐλεήμων ἐν ὥραις βιαίος (/. βιαίαις). (2) As the hour was the shortest period of time known to the ancients, ὥρα came to be used much as we use “in one second,’’ ‘‘in one moment,” “instantly,” e.g. P Tebt II. 4114 (ii/A.D.) ἅμα τῷ λαβεῖν μου τὴν ἐπιστολὴν αὐτῇ ὥρᾳ ἄνελθε, ‘immediately after receiving my letter, come up instantly ” (Edd.), and similarly P Oxy IX. 1193? (iv/a.D.) : cf. Lk 28, and for the added…
Read the full entry →ὥρα (hōra) — hour.
ὥρα,
__CIonic dialect ὥρη, ἡ: Epic dialect genitive plural ὡράων, Ionic dialect ὡρέων: locative plural ὥρασι, (which see) any period, fixed by natural laws and revolutions, whether of the year, month, or day (the sense 'day' is implied in the compound ἑπτάωρος, which see), νυκτός τε ὥραν καὶ μηνὸς καὶ ἐνιαυτοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__C.I in [Refs 8th c.BC+], part of the year, season; mostly in plural, the seasons, ὅτε τέτρατον ἦλθεν ἔτος καὶ ἐπήλυθον ὧραι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ μεταλλάσσουσι αἱ ὧραι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάσαις ὥραις at all seasons, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χαλεπὴ ὥ. a bad season, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; ἡ ὥ. αὕτη this season, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ τὰς ὥρας according to the seasons, [Refs 8th…
ὥρα
hora
apparently a primary word; an "hour" (literally or
figuratively):--day, hour, instant, season, X short, (even-)tide,
(high) time.
ὥρα, ας, ἡ
n.f.
an hour, season
ὥρα hōra 106x
a limited portion of time, marked out by part of a settled routine or train of circumstances; a season of the year; time of day, Mt. 14:15; Mk. 6:35; 11:11; an hour, Mt. 20:3; Jn. 11:9; in NT an eventful season, 1 Jn. 2:18 (2x); Rev. 3:10; 14:7; due time, Jn. 16:21; Rom. 13:11; a destined period, hour, Mt. 26:45; Mk. 14:35;
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
our (sha`atha', she`a'; hora): Hour as a division of the day does not occur in the Old Testament; the term she`a' (sha`atha') found in Dnl, is Aramaic, and as used there denotes a short period or point of time of no definite length (Da 3:6,15; 4:33 (Hebrew 30); 5:5). The Greek hora is commonly used in the New Testament in the same way, as "that same hour," "from that hour," etc., but it also occurs as a division of the day, as, "the third hour," "the ninth hour," etc. The Hebrews would seem to have become acquainted with this division of time through the Babylonians, but whether before the captivity we are not certain. The mention of the sun dial of Ahaz would seem to indicate some such reckoning of time during the monarchy.
See TIME.
H. Porter
Hour
First found in Dan. 3:6; 4:19, 33;5:5. It is the rendering of the Chaldee shaah, meaning a “moment,” a “look.” It is used in the New Testament frequently to denote some determinate season (Matt. 8:13; Luke 12:39).
With the ancient Hebrews the divisions of the day were “morning, evening, and noon-day” (Ps. 55:17, etc.). The Greeks, following the Babylonians, divided the day into twelve hours. The Jews, during the Captivity, learned also from the Babylonians this method of dividing time. When Judea became subject to the Romans, the Jews adopted the Roman mode of reckoning time. The night was divided into four watches (
The ancient Hebrews were probably unacquainted with the division of the natural day into twenty-four parts; but they afterwards parcelled out the period between sunrise and sunset into a series of divisions distinguished by the sun’s course. The early Jews appear to have divided the day into four parts, (Nehemiah 9:3) and the night into three watches, (Judges 7:19) and even in the New Testament we find a trace of this division in (Matthew 20:1-5) At what period the Jews first became acquainted with the division of the day into twelve hours is unknown, but it is generally supposed they learned it from the Babylonians during the captivity. It was known to the Egyptians at a very early period. They had twelve hours of the day and…
108 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 106 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ πρὸς τούτοις αἱ ἐτήσιοι ὧραι τέτταρες αἱ ζῴων καὶ φυτῶν αἴτιαι γενέσεως, τετραχῆ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ διανεμηθέντος εἰς χειμῶνα καὶ ἔαρ καὶ θέρος καὶ μετόπωρον.
τῇ τετάρτῃ δὲ διακοσμεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἡλίῳ καὶ σελήνῃ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἄστροις κινήσεις αὐτοῖς ἐπιστείλας καὶ δρόμους, οἷς ἂν αἱ τῶν ὡρῶν περιφοραὶ σημαίνοιντο.
ἐλεύσῃ δὲ ἐν τάφῳ ὥσπερ σῖτος ὥριμος κατὰ καιρὸν θεριζόμενος, ἢ ὥσπερ θημωνιὰ ἅλωνος καθ̓ ὤραν συγκομισθεῖσα.
τῇ κη τοῦ Παχὼν τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος γ ἔτους Γαΐου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ, ὀψίτερον τῆς ὥρας ἐπελθόντες λῃστρικῷ τρόπῳ Διονύσιος Πύρρου καὶ Ἀμώεις λεγόμενος Ἀλαλλίη καὶ τοῦ … λεγομένου Κ
ν τῆς Διονυσιάδος παρέχητε ὁπότερʼ ὑμῶν ὑπὸ ἄξονα ἀποφερόμενον εἰς Ἰβιῶνα Ἀργαίου καὶ ἡ ὥρα αὐτὸν καταλάβῃ τοῦ καταχθῆναι παρʼ ὑμῖν παράσχετε αὐτῷ τροφὰς καὶ τῷ ταυρελάτῃ τὴν συνήθην
παρὰ τοῦ πραιποσίτου τεσσαλαρίῳ καὶ κουαδραρίῳ κώμης Καρανίδος. αὐτῆς ὥρας δεξάμενοί μου τὰ γράμματα ἥκετε … … τῇ ζ ἕως του
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
θερίζω (therizō) means to reap or harvest, primarily used in agricultural contexts. It appears in various New Testament passages, including Matthew and Galatians, often metaphorically to signify reaping rewards or consequences of actions. The word is derived from the root related to summer work and can also imply cutting off or destroying in a figurative sense.
θερίζω ; fut. θερίσω [B. 37 (32), cf. WH. App. p. 163 sq-]; 1 aor. eetieaas ; 1 aor. pass. ἐθερίσθην; (θέρος) ; Sept. for yp; [fr. Aeschyl., Hadt. down]; to reap, harvest; a. ah Mt. vi. 26; Lk. xii. 24; Jas.v. 4; [fig. Jn. iv. 36 (bis)]. Ὅ. in aa erbial expressions about sowing and reapiny: ἄλλος . . - ὁ θερίζων, one does the work, another gets the reward, Jn. iv. 37 sq. (where the meaning is ‘ye hereafter, in winning over a far greater number of the Samaritans to the kingdom of God, will enjoy the fruits of the work which I have now commenced among them’ [al. do not restrict the reference to converted Samaritans]); θερίζων ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειpas, unjustly appropriating 1o thyself the fruits of others’ labor, Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Lk. xix. 21 sq.; ὃ ἐὰν -- θερίσει, as aman has acted (on earth) so (hereafter by God) will he be requited, either with reward or penalty, (his deeds will determine his…
Read the full entry →θερίζω. An interesting example of this verb is found in P Magd 1212 (p.c. 217), where a farmer, finding himself expelled by the proprietors from his holding on the approach of harvest, on the ground that his contract had not been properly sealed, petitions that they should not be allowed to reap the crops until the case had been decided—tws δὲ τοῦ διέξοδον λαβεῖν τὴν κρίσιν μὴ θερίζειν αὐτούς. See also P Fay 1129 (A.D. 99) where the considerable, but illiterate, landowner Gemellus writes to his nephew—tav ὥγμ[ον] (1. τὸν ὄγμ[ον]) τῆς ᾿Απιάδος ἕως σήμερον ov ἐθέρ[ι]σας ἀλλ᾽ ἠμέληκας αὐτοῦ καὶ μέχρι τούτου τὼ ἥμυσυ αὐτοῦ ἐθέρισας, “up to to-day you have not harvested the field at Apias, but have neglected it, and so far have only harvested the half” (Edd.): cf. 76. 1207 (c. A.D. 100). Other exx. are P Flor I. 807 (i/ii A.D.) ὁμολογοῦμ[ε]ν παρέξειν ἡμᾶς θερίζοντες (/.—tas) ols ἔχεις…
Read the full entry →θερίζω (therizō) — to reap.
θερίζω,
Boeotian dialect infinitive θερίδδειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future Attic dialect -ιῶ[Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐθέρισα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; poetry ἐθέρισσα [Refs]; later (subjunctive) ἐκθερίξω [Refs] —middle (see. below):—passive, aorist ἐθερίσθην: perfect τεθέρισμαι (see. below): (θέρος):—do summer-work, mow, reap, σῖτον, κριθάς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, harvest, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— middle, καρπὸν Δηοῦς θερίσασθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, ἃ [δράγματα] ἔτυχεν.. τεθερισμένα [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. metaphorically, mow down, Ἄρη τὸν.. θερίζοντα βροτούς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θ. Ἀσίαν to plunder it, [Refs 1st c.AD+]
θερίζω
therizo
from 2330 (in the sense of the crop); to harvest:--reap.
see GREEK for 2330
θερίζω
v.
I reap, gather
θερίζω therizō 21x
to gather in harvest, reap, Mt. 6:26; 25:24, 26; met. to reap the reward of labor, 1 Cor. 9:11; 2 Cor. 9:6; to reap the harvest of vengeance, Rev. 14:15, 16
θερίζω θέρος to do summer-work, to mow, reap, σῖτον, κριθάς, καρπόν Hdt., Ar., etc.:—Mid., καρπὸν Δηοῦς θερίσασθαι id. Ar.
metaph. to cut off, Soph., Eur.
metaph. to reap a good harvest, Ar.
ὁ θερίζων (with or without λόγος) a kind of syllogism, Luc.
intr. to pass the summer, Xen.; cf. ἐαρίζω, χειμάζω.
Verb-AAN — Verb · aorist · active · infinitiveaorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5658
21 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 21 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὁ δ’ ἔσπειρε μὲν ἐπιδεικνύμενος τὴν ἐχθρὰν φθόνου καὶ κακίας ἀρετήν, εὑρεῖν δέ, ἀλλ’ οὐ θερίσαι λέγεται·
καὶ τότε λοιπὸν δημοσίᾳ ἔξεστι πᾶσι καὶ ἰδίᾳ θερίζειν.
δὲ τῶν θεριστῶν γίγνωσκε ὅτι ἐὰν πρὸς μισθὸν αὐτοὺς θερίσωσιν αλ … πρὸς ἀρουρισμὸν θερίζουσιν ἑκάστης ἀρούρας ἀνὰ δραχμὰς β τριώβολον· εὐτύχει
καὶ λικμητρίδας δύο καὶ πτύον ἕν , ἐπεὶ κολάζομαι αὐτῶν εἰς Ἀφροδίτην πόλιν, καὶ θέρισον τὸν ὄγμον τῆς Ἀπιάδος καὶ λύσεις εὐθέως εἰς Ἀ … … τὰ δράγματα, καὶ
ἀπὸ δεκάτης ἡμέρας τοῦ Παχὼν καὶ οὐκ ἀποστησόμεθα … καὶ τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ὁμοίως θερίσομεν … περὶ Νεκοσὺ ἀρούρας τρεῖς ο … … τη … εν … ης συμφωνίας.
The Greek word ὅτι (hoti) is a conjunction primarily meaning 'that' or 'because.' It introduces objective clauses, often following verbs of perception or declaration, and can also serve as a causal particle. The New Testament frequently employs it in this way, such as in Matthew 5:4-12. There is some variation in how lexicons describe its usage, particularly regarding its pleonastic function in direct discourse.
ὅτι [properly neut. of ὅστις], a conjunction [fr. Hom. down], (Lat. quod [ef. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149, 87), marking I. the substance or contents (of a statement), that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : ἀναγγέλλειν, Acts xiv. 27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts ix. 273; εἰπεῖν, Mt. xvi. 20; xxviii. 7,13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; λέγειν, Mt. iii. 9; vill. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv.7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 9 [T Tr WH om. L br. ὅτι}; ix. 2, and very often; προεἰρηκέναι, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the ὅτι in Acts xiv. 22 supply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες [ef. B. §151, 11]; ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Co. ix.10; 1 Jn. 11. 12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; iii. 28; iv. 44; ὁμολογεῖν, Heb. xi. 13; δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δηλοῦν, 1 Co. i. 11; διδάσκειν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ἐμφανίζειν. Heb. xi. 14; δῆλον (ἐστίν), 1 Co.…
Read the full entry →οτι. (1) For ὅτι, ‘‘that,” introducing an objective clause after verbs of knowing, saying, etc., cf. P Tebt II. 4098 (A.D. 5) εἰδὼ[ς ὅ]τι ἐξίι)ουσίαν αὐτῶν ἔχει kal Λυσίμαχος kal σύ, ΚΕ knew that both you and Lysimachus had plenty of them” (Edd.), P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) νομίσας ὅτι (cf. Mt 517) κιχρᾷς por αὐτούς, ““ consider that you are lending them (sc. staters) to me’’ (Edd.), BGU III. 8464* (ii/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 93) γεινώσκειν σαι θέλω, ὅτι οὐχ [HA] Lov, ὅτι ἀναβένις (1. ἀναβαίνεις) els τὴν μητρόπολιν, “1 wish you to know that I had no hope that you were coming up to the metropolis,” 74.9 αἴγραψά σοι, ὅτι γυμνός εἰμει, “1 wrote you that I am naked,” and P Tebt II. 420+ (iii/A.D.) οἴδατε ὅτι ἀπὸ ζημίας ἠμί, ‘‘ You know that I am blameless.” Ὅτι, however, is frequently omitted, e.g. BGU IIL. 8153(ii/a.p.) γεινόσκιν σε θέλω [τὴ]ν ἐπιστολήν σου ἔλαβε (corrected by another hand…
Read the full entry →ὅτι (hoti) — that/since: that.
ὅτῐ,
Epic dialect ὅττῐ (both in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: conjunction, to introduce an objective clause, that, after Verbs of seeing or knowing, thinking or saying; in [Refs 8th c.BC+] —Usage:
I. when ὅτι introduces a statement of fact:
I. a in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always with indicative, the tense following the same rules as in English, ἤγγειλ᾽ ὅττι ῥά οἱ πόσις ἔκτοθι μίμνε πυλάων [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I. b in Attic dialect, ὅτι takes indicative after primary tenses, indicative or optative after secondary tenses, e.g. ἐνδείκνυμαι ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι σοφός [Refs 5th c.BC+] news came that Megara had (literal has) revolted, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes optative and indicative are found in the same sentence, ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, Ἀριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς.. εἴη [Refs 5th c.BC+].. and the accusative with infinitive…
ὅτι
hoti
neuter of 3748 as conjunction; demonstrative, that (sometimes
redundant); causative, because:--as concerning that, as though,
because (that), for (that), how (that), (in) that, though, why.
see GREEK for 3748
ὅτι
Cj.
that, since, because
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
be-kos' (hina, "in order that"): "The multitude rebuked them, because (AV; the Revised Version (British and American) "that") they should hold their peace" (Mt 20:31).
1,329 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,293 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Μωυσῆς δὲ καὶ φιλοσοφίας ἐπ’ αὐτὴν φθάσας ἀκρότητα καὶ χρησμοῖς τὰ πολλὰ καὶ συνεκτικώτατα τῶν τῆς φύσεως ἀναδιδαχθεὶς ἔγνω δή, ὅτι ἀναγκαιότατόν ἐστιν ἐν τοῖς οὖσι τὸ μὲν εἶναι δραστήριον αἴτιον, τὸ δὲ παθητόν, καὶ ὅτι τὸ μὲν δραστήριον ὁ τῶν ὅλων…
ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.
ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.
καὶ τὴν εἰκοστὴν τοῦ ἐγκυκλίου καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ καθήκοντα. … ται Προῖτος, καθʼ ὅτι πρόκειται … ἑξήκοντα ἓξ τετρωβόλου καὶ τῆς … … τοπογραμματέως τοῦ Παθυρίτου … ἀρουρῶν
ι τοῖς ἐνκαλουμένοις τὸ ἀντίγραφον τῆς ἐντεύξεως λαβεῖν παρ … τ … … πίστιν ὅτι ἀπαντησα … ἐπὶ τὸ ἐν τῆι αὐλῆι κριτήριον ἐν ἡμέραις λ οὐκ ο
δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι τοῦ καὶ ἡμᾶς ὅτι τάχος ἐπιβαλεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἔρρωσοἔρρωσο ἔτους κϛ Φαμενὼθ ιϛ
ξηραίνω (xērainō) means to dry up or wither, often used for plants, crops, and even parts of the body. It can describe the process of desiccation or the state of being dry. The New Testament uses it in contexts such as withered plants (e.g., Mt 21:19) and the drying up of fluids (e.g., Mk 5:29). There is some variation in how lexicons describe its implications, particularly regarding the nuances of ripening and wasting away.
ξηραίνω
(< ξηρός),
[in LXX chiefly for יָבֵשׁ;]
to dry up, parch, wither. c. acc., τ. χόρτον, Ja 1:11; pass., to become or be dry or withered: of plants, Mt 13:6 21:19, 20, Mk 4:6 11:20, 21, Lk 8:6, Jo 15:6, I Pe 1:24; of ripened crops, Re 14:15; of liquids, Mk 5:29, Re 16:12; of members of the body, to waste away, Mk 3:1 (cf. III Ki 13:4) 9:18.†
ξηραίνω: 1 aor. ἐξήρανα (Jas. i. 11); Pass., pres. Enpatνομαι; pi. 3 pers. sing. ἐξήρανται (Mk. xi. 21), ptep. ἐξηpappevos; 1 aor. ἐξηράνθην ; cf. B. 41 (36); (fr. ξηρός, q. v.); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for wa. and wajn; to make dry, dry up, wither: act., τὸν χόρτον, Jas. i. 11; pass. to become dry, to be dry, be withered [cf. B. 52 (45)] (Sept. for 073.) : of plants, Mt. xiii. 6; xxi. 19 sq.; Mk. iv. 6; xi. 20 sq.; Lk. viii. 6; Jn. xv. 6; [1 Pet. i. 24]; of the ripening of crops, Rev. xiv. 15; of fluids: ἡ πηγή, Mk. v. 29; τὸ ὕδωρ, Rev. xvi. 12, (Gen. viii. 7; Is. xix. 5); of 2 Evpaw members of the body, to waste away, pine away: Mk. ix. 18; ἐξηραμμένη χείρ, a withered hand, Mk. iii. 1, and RG in 8.
ξηραίνω. With Mt 2119 ἐξηράνθη παραχρῆμα ἡ συκῆ may be compared the interesting report regarding a persea tree, addressed to the logistes of Oxyrhynchus. of the guild of carpenters who had been commissioned to examine the tree states that he found it—&kapmov οὖσαν πολλςῶ]ν ἐτῶν διόλου ξηραντῖσαν (/. ξηρανθεῖσαν) καὶ μὴ δύνασθαι ἐντε[Ὁ]θεῖν καρ]ποὺ[ς] ἀποδιδόναι, ‘barren for many years, quite dried up and unable to produce any more fruit” (P Oxy 1. 53°%—a.p. 316): cf. P Oxy IX. 1188192123 (A.D. 13), and on the value and associations of the persea tree see Wilcken Archiv i. p. 127. Other exx. of the verb are BGU IV. 10404 (ii/A.D.) τάχα δύνασαι ἀναβιοναῖ Jar (ὃ ἀναβιώσασθαι) τὴν ποτίστραν (‘«watering-place”’), εἰ δὲ μή, ξηραίν[ετ]αι, P Leid Wi (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ Π|. p. 83) ξήρανον ἐν σκιᾷ (of flowers used in magic), and P Flor 11. 1451} (A.D. 266-7) τὰ δὲ τεμνόμενα φυτὰ εὐθέως εἰς ὕδωρ…
Read the full entry →ξηραίνω (xērainō) — to dry.
ξηραίνω,
future -ᾰνῶ[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐξήρἀνα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, future ξηρανθήσομαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+]middle ξηρᾰνοῦμαι in same sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐξηράνθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect ἐξήρασμαι [NT+5th c.BC+]; infinitive ἀπ-εξηράνθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle ἐξηρᾱμένος only late, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]: (ξηρός):—parch, dry up, ξηρανεῖ σ᾽ ὁ Βάκχιος E. [prev. cited]; of the sun, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; make costive, τὴν κοιλίην [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, to be or become dry, parched, ἐξηράνθη πεδίον Il.[same place],[Refs 5th c.BC+]; to be withered, ἐξηράνθη ἡ συκῆ [NT+2nd c.BC+]
2. drain dry, ξηράνας τὴν διώρυχα [Refs 5th c.BC+]
ξηραίνω
xeraino
from 3584; to desiccate; by implication, to shrivel, to mature:--dry
up, pine away, be ripe, wither (away).
see GREEK for 3584
ξηραίνω
v.
I dry up, parch, ripen
ξηραίνω ξηρός to parch up, dry up, Eur., Xen.:—Pass. to become or be dry, parched, Il., etc.
to lay dry, Lat. siccare, Thuc.
Verb-API-3S — Verb · aorist · passive · indicative · third person · singularaorist passive indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-API-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
15 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 15 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 46 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὁ δὲ κατὰ τὴν μετοπωρινὴν ἰσημερίαν τῇ τάξει [πρώτῃ] πρῶτος ὢν ἐν ταῖς ἡλιακαῖς περιόδοις οὐ λέγεται παρὰ τῷ νόμῳ πρῶτος, ὅτι κατ’ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον συγκεκομισμένων τῶν καρπῶν ἁπάντων τὰ δένδρα φυλλορροεῖ καὶ ὅσα ἀκμάζον τὸ ἔαρ ἤνεγκε πάντα…
τοὺς σοὺς πάντας καὶ τάχα δύνασαι ἀναβιονα … αι τὴν ποτίστραν, εἰ δὲ μή, ξηραίνεται. ἐρρῶσθαί σε εὔχομαι.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word θερισμός (therismos) means 'harvest' and is derived from the verb θερίζω (therizo), which means 'to reap.' It encompasses the act of harvesting, the time of harvest, and the crop itself, with figurative uses relating to spiritual themes, such as the gathering of believers or judgment. The New Testament references include John 4:35 and Matthew 9:37.
θερισμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (θερίζω), harvest: i.q.theact of reaping, Jn. iv. 35; fig. of the gathering of men into the kingdom of God, ibid. i. q. the time of reaping, i. 6. fig. the time of final judgment, when the righteous are gathered into the kingdom of God and the wicked are delivered up to destruction, Mt. xiii. 30, 39; Mk. iv. 29. 1. q. the crop to be reaped, i. e. fig. a multitude of men to be taught how to obtain salvation, Mt. ix. 37 sq. ; Lk. x. 2; ἐξηράνθη 6 θερισμός, the crops are ripe for the harvest, i. e. the time is come to destroy the wicked, Rev. xiv. 15. (Sept. for W¥p; rare in Grk. writ., as Xen. oee. 18, 3; Polyb. 5, 95, 5.)
θερισμός Michel οϑ214 (p.c. 217-16) καλῶς καὶ εὐσεβῶς διετέλεσεν θεραπεύουσα τὰς θεάς, OG/S οοὐῦ (the Rosetta stone, B.C. 196) τοὺς ἱερεῖς θεραπεύειν τὰς εἰκόνας τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας, Syll 583° (i/A.D.) τῶν ἱεροδούλων καὶ τὸν θεὸν θεραπευόντων, and 26. 633! (ii/A.D.) καὶ εὐείλατος γένοι(τ)ο ὁ θεὸς τοῖς θεραπεύουσιν ἁπλῇ τῇ ψυχῇ. In P Tor I. (B.c. 117—6) the verb is used with reference to those who “care for”? dead bodies—ats (sc. θεαῖς) ἀθέμιτά ἐστιν νεκρὰ σώματα, καὶ οἱ ταῦτα θεραπεύοντες, and in P Giss I. 791-9 (c. A.D. 117) of cloaks that had been repaired—rovs φαινο[ύ]λας σου τεθεραπευομένους ἤνεγκεν ἀπ᾽ ᾿Αλεξανδρείας ᾿Απολλώνιος ὁ ἀδελφός σου. See also the early P Magd 15° (B.c. 221) where a barber claims that he has served his patron in an irreproachable manner—rteQepatreukas ἀνεγκλή[τως. For the subst. θεραπευτής, see P Lond 4419 (Β.σ. 161) (=I. p. 34) ὑπὸ τοῦ Σαράπιος θεραπευτῶν, and…
Read the full entry →θερισμός (therismos) — harvest.
θερ-ισμός, ὁ,
mowing, reaping, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. reaping-time, harvest, [NT+5th c.BC+]
II.2. harvest, crop, [LXX+NT]
θερισμός
therismos
from 2325; reaping, i.e. the crop:--harvest.
see GREEK for 2325
θερισμός, οῦ, ὁ
n.m.
reaping, harvest
θερισμός therismos 13x
a harvest, the act of gathering in the harvest, reaping, Jn. 4:35; met. the harvest of the Gospel, Mt. 9:37, 38; Lk. 10:2; a crop; met. the crop of vengeance, Rev. 14:15
θερισμός θερισμός, ὁ, θερίζω reaping-time, harvest, NTest.
the harvest, crop, id. NTest.
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
har'-vest (qatsir; therismos): To many of us, harvest time is of little concern, because in our complex life we are far removed from the actual production of our food supplies, but for the Hebrew people, as for those in any agricultural district today, the harvest was a most important season (Ge 8:22; 45:6). Events were reckoned from harvests (Ge 30:14; Jos 3:15; Jud 15:1; Ru 1:22; 2:23; 1Sa 6:13; 2Sa 21:9; 23:13). The three principal feasts of the Jews corresponded to the three harvest seasons (
Harvest
The season for gathering grain or fruit. On the 16th day of Abib (or April) a handful of ripe ears of corn was offered as a first-fruit before the Lord, and immediately after this the harvest commenced (Lev. 23:9-14; 2 Sam. 21:9, 10; Ruth 2:23). It began with the feast of Passover and ended with Pentecost, thus lasting for seven weeks (Ex. 23:16). The harvest was a season of joy (Ps. 126:1-6; Isa. 9:3). This word is used figuratively Matt. 9:37; 13:30; Luke…
[AGRICULTURE]
→ Sabbath to be observed in Ex 34:21
→ Sabbath desecrated in Ne 13:15-22
→ Of wheat at Pentecost, in Palestine Ex 34:22; Le 23:15-17
→ And of wheat before harvest time Le 26:5
13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 18 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὁ γοῦν ἱερὸς λόγος τοὺς ὁρῶντας εἰσάγει θερίζοντας καί, τὸ παραδοξότατον, οὐ κριθὰς ἢ πυρούς, ἀλλὰ τὸν θερισμὸν αὐτὸν ἐκθερίζοντας·
α 𐅵, γίνονται πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι β ϛ, λοιπαὶ ἐκ τούτων πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι ζ. μισθῶν θερισμοῦ διὰ Κρονίωνος πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι ε, Ταλάντου πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι α, Καπίτωνος πυροῦ ἀρτάβης 𐅵, Πτολμαίου
r Κάστωρ Ἀπολλωνίωι τῶι ἀδελφῶι χαίρειν. ἅμα τῷ με ἀνελθεῖν με ἀπὸ τοῦ θερισμοῦ προσῆλθον τῶι στρατηγῶι καὶ ὑπέμνησα αὐτὸν περὶ τῆς δεήσεως ἡμῶν καὶ χάρις αὐτῶι. ἐποίησε
εἰς φύλλον ἐργάτῃ α δραχμὴν α ἡμιωβέλιον σοβοῦντι τὰς ἴβεις ἐργάτῃ α δραχμὰς δ θερισμοῦ ἐργάταις ιδ δραχμὰς κ … … … … πο δραγματ γ ἐργάτῃ α δραχμὴν
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word γῆ (gē) means 'earth' or 'land' and is used in various contexts, including the physical ground, cultivated land, and regions or countries. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often contrasting with 'heaven' or 'sea.' The lexicons indicate a consensus on its meanings, which encompass both the solid part of the globe and the concept of territory.
γῆ; gen. γῆς, 7, (contr. fr. yéa, poet. γαῖα), Sept. very often for γι and ΤΣ, earth; 1. arable land: Mt. xiii. 5, 8, 23; Mk. iv. 8, 20, 26, 28, 31; Lk. xiii. 7; xiv. 35 (34); Jn. xii. 24; Heb. vi. 7; Jas. v. 7; Rev. ix. 4; of the earthy material out of which a thing is formed, with the implied idea of frailty and weakness: ἐκ γῆς χοϊκός, 1 Co. xv. 47. 2. the ground, the earth as a standing-place, (Germ. Boden) : Mt. x. 29; xv. 35; xxiii. 85; xxvii. 51; Mk. viii. 6; ix. 20; xiv. 35; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; xxiv. 5; Jn. viii. 6, 8, [i.e Rec.]; Acts ix. 4, 8. 3. the main /and, opp. to sea or water: Mk. iv. 1; vi. 47; Lk. ν. 8; viii. 27; Jn. vi. 21; xxi. 8 sq. 11; Rev. xii. 12. 4. the earth as a whole, the world (Lat. terrarum orbis); a. the earth as opp. to the heavens: Mt. v. 18, 35; vi.10; xvi.19; xviii. 18; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. ii. 14; Jn. xii. 32; Acts ii. 19…
Read the full entry →γῆ. The rare plural forms of this word which are found in the LXX may be illustrated from the Ptolemaic papyri of 1i/B.c., e.g. BGU III. 993329 (νος 128-7) γῶν τε καὶ οἰκιῶν, P Tor I. 12° (B.c. 116) ἕνεκεν τοῦ kal τῶν γῶν μὴ μετεσχηκέναι αὐτήν, P Tebt I. 6% (B.c. 140-39) yas τε καὶ ἕτερα : see Thackeray G7. i. p. 143. In MGr, beside ἢ γῆ, we have the indeclinable ἢ γῆς, τῆς γῆς, etc. : see Thumb Handbook, p. 57. The familiar Biblical ἔπὶ γῆς appears in P Ryl 11. $78 (early iii/A.b.) 6 αὐτὸς ὁριοδείκτης ἐπέδειξα ἐπὶ γῆς (restored from 1.*), “1 the said surveyor have verified it on the spot”: the editors suggest that ἐπὶ γῆς should be read in P Thead 54% and 55%. It may be observed that γῆ in papyri is regularly ‘‘land” in small or moderate quantities, a sense never found in NT, where γῆ is always antithetic to sky or sea, or denotes a district or country, The LXX and papyri, in their use…
Read the full entry →γῆ (gē) — earth: planet.
γῆ, ἡ,
occasionally in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: dual γαῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γῶν [Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—earth (including land and sea, [Refs 7th c.BC+] opposed to heaven, or land opposed to sea, Γῆ τε καὶ Ἠέλιος καὶ Ἐρινύες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τίς γ; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κατὰ γῆν on land, by land, opposed to ναυσί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to ἐκ θαλάσσης, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ γῆς on earth, opposed to νέρθε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ γῆς below the earth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: genitive with local Adverbs, ἵνα γῆς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ποῦ, ποῖ, ὅποι γ., [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. earth, as an element, [Refs 6th c.BC+]
2. b γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ αἰτεῖν, as tokens of submission, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
γῆ
ge
contracted from a primary word; soil; by extension a region, or the
solid part or the whole of the terrene globe (including the occupants
in each application):--country, earth(-ly), ground, land, world.
γῆ, γῆς, ἡ
n.f.
the earth, soil, land
γῆ gē 250x
earth, soil, Mt. 13:5; Mk. 4:8, et al.; the ground, surface of the earth, Mt. 10:29; Lk. 6:49, et al.; the land, as opposed to the sea or a lake, Lk. 5:11; Jn. 21:8, 9, 11; the earth, world, Mt. 5:18, 35, et al.; by synec. the inhabitants of the earth, Mt. 5:13; 6:10; 10:34; a land, region, tract, country, territory, Mt. 2:20; 14:34;by way of eminence, the chosen land, Read the full entry →
γῆ earth opp. to heaven, or land opp. to sea, Hom., etc.; κατὰ γῆν on land, by land, Thuc.; κατὰ γῆς Xen.:— ἐπὶ γῆς on earth, Soph.; κατὰ γῆς below the earth, Trag.:—the gen. with local adverbs, ἵνα γῆς, ποῦ γῆς, ubi terrarum, where in (in what quarter of) the world, where on earth, Soph., etc.
earth, as an element, opp. to air, water, fire, Plat.
a land, country, Aesch., etc.; γῆν πρὸ γῆς from land to land, id. Aesch.
the earth or ground as tilled, Soph., Plat.
a lump of earth, in the phrase γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ αἰτεῖν, γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ διδόναι, in token of submission, Hdt.
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
urth ('adhamah, 'erets, 'aphar; ge, oikoumene):
In a hilly limestone country like Palestine, the small amount of iron oxide in the rocks tends to be oxidized, and thereby to give a prevailing reddish color to the soil. This is especially the case on relatively barren hills where there is little organic matter present to prevent reddening and give a more blackish tinge.
'Adhamah (compare 'adham, "a man," and Adam) is from 'adham, "to be red," and is used in the senses: "earth" (Ex 20:24), "land" (Ps 105:35), a "land" or country (Isa 14:2), "ground" (Ge 4:11), "the earth" (Ge 7:4).
Earth
(1.) In the sense of soil or ground, the translation of the word adamah’. In Gen. 9:20 “husbandman” is literally “man of the ground or earth.” Altars were to be built of earth (Ex. 20:24). Naaman asked for two mules’ burden of earth (2 Kings 5:17), under the superstitious notion that Jehovah, like the gods of the heathen, could be acceptably worshipped only on his own soil.
(2). As the rendering of ’erets, it means the whole world (Gen. 1:2); the land as opposed to the sea (1:10). Erets also denotes a country (21:32); a plot of ground (23:15); the ground on which a man stands (33:3); the inhabitants of the earth (6:1; 11:1); all the world except Israel (
The term is used in two widely-different senses: (1) for the material of which the earth’s surface is composed; (2) as the name of the planet on which man dwells. The Hebrew language discriminates between these two by the use of separate terms, adamah for the former, erets for the latter. Adamah is the earth in the sense of soil or ground, particularly as being susceptible of cultivation. (Genesis 2:7) Erets is applied in a more or less extended sense-- (1) to the whole world, (Genesis 1:1) (2) to land as opposed to sea, (Genesis 1:10) (3) to a country, (Genesis 21:32) (4) to a plot of ground, (Genesis 23:15) and (5) to…
In both Hebrew and Greek the same word is used to denote the earth as a whole, and a particular land. Only the context can enable us to decide in which of these senses it is to be taken in a given passage.
Thus in Mt 27:45 we might, so far as the original word is concerned, render either "there was darkness over all the land," or over all the earth. The expression "all the earth" is sometimes used hyperbolically for a large portion of it, Ezr 1:2. The word is used of the whole world, etc. In a moral sense, earthly is opposed to what is heavenly, spiritual and holy, Joh 3:31 1Co 15:47 Col 3:2
255 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 250 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 1,727 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Φησὶ δ’ ὡς „ἐν ἀρχῇ ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν", τὴν ἀρχὴν παραλαμβάνων | οὐχ ὡς οἴονταί τινες τὴν κατὰ χρόνον·
ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.
λέγει δὲ πάλιν πρὸς αὐτούς: Μὴ ἐγὼ ἐνετειλάμην τοῖς πατράσιν ὑμῶν ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, προσενέγκαι μοι ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ θυσίας;
Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ
μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀδύνατος ὄμμασι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι περὶ Πάθυριν γῆν ἤπειρον σιτοφόρον ἀρουρῶν … ἧς γείτονες νότουπλατεῖαὁδός, βορρᾶ … περίχωμα … προπεπρα
ξ μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἀδιαιρέτου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ πεδίωι Παθύρεως τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἕβδομον·